Home

Sebring Convertible

1. WM Jump Starting Procedures 344 Bl Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 0 0 348 E Towing A Disabled Vehicle Without The Ignition Key Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The CrOUTId oou ear ke eas ce a URS 349 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly 000000008 350 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Flasher switch is located in the Instrument Panel Switch Bank above the climate controls Push and release the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers When the Hazard Warning is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Push and release the switch a second time to turn off the flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning Flash ers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic
2. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Tire Identification Number TIN located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted however the date code may only be on one side Tires with on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pres
3. 369 Air Conditioning cess 232 Air Conditioning Controls 232 Air Conditioning Filter iss 244 370 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 245 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 369 370 Air Conditioning System 232 237 369 Air Pressure Tires 2 1 0 0 000 ce eee eee 289 Airbag 2 894 debe ue Pte REPRE Peers 48 Airbag Deployment s sse raserna aa 52 53 56 Airbag Light ce ete see 4a es 52 53 99 75 177 Airbag Maintenance s eeaeee aa 0000s 58 Alarmi Panie 5 3 ces pede ER eae a es 25 Alarm Security Alarm 0 18 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 177 Alignment and Balance 06 297 Alterations Modifications Vehicle Z Antenna Satellite Radio lun 226 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 376 377 A09 Disposal woes cada n i i enin she pue 379 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 268 Anti Lock Warning Light 268 269 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Appearance Car 2 494 39 becie e Ara 387 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Ashtray eteme uer es cedo ewe CRI ees 163 Audio Systems Radio 213 217 Auto Down Power Windows 33 Auto Unlock Doors 0 0 0 0 000 eee 31 Auto Up Power Windows Automatic Dimming Mirror sss 96 Automatic Door Locks 0 00000 31 Automatic Headlig
4. 00040 21 To Unlock The Doors eese 21 To Lock The Doors 0000000000 24 Convertible Top Operation 25 To Unlatch The Trunk 0 25 Express Down Window Feature 25 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Using The Panic Alarm 0 25 W Trunk Safety Warning occ ink eae RR mmn 38 Programming Additional Transmitters 26 Trunk Emergency Release 38 Battery Replacement 0 0 26 Wi Occupant Restraints 0000 39 General Information seen 27 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 0 40 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 27 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 44 How To Use Remote Start 28 Seat Belt Pretensioners 0 45 E Door Locks 5 eon cee Varese ar ewe ee ces 29 Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System Manual Door Locks 29 S ae x Pera iprsissszocescXrriadd 30 Automatic Locking Mode 47 la Windows e Reb eR a 32 pede Belts nd Brenan WOMEN sdsgsiat d vins v Power Windows lt lt arcu cece o LLL 32 Seat Belt Extender lt oc corico ssrr serasi 48 Wind Buffeting o oo aooo 36 a ree dl ME i H Trunk Lock And Release 000 36 Event Data Recorder DR uices 60 es THINGS TO KNO
5. 0 0 00 000 cee eee 62 63 Information Center Vehicle 05 187 Instrument Cluster 0005 174 175 176 Instrument Panel and Controls 173 Instrument Panel Cover 00055 389 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 391 Integrated Power Module Fuses 395 Interior Appearance Care 004 389 Interior Lighting 0000 138 144 Interior Lights sx SR Kae 144 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 147 Introduction sa o danke Rae Bees e a 4 Jack Locatii nsss eae ate a Resa Kate C 339 Jack Operation o n onoono 338 340 HO 442 INDEX ae Jacking Instructions llle 340 J mp Starting iiie ee ehe eyed 344 Key Programming eere 17 Key Replacement mersrgnnpeds rera ENS NNE 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer anaana aaa 15 Key In Reminder 0 0 00 0000 14 Keyless Entry System 0 0 0 0 0 000008 21 KEYS ahi ntsc tata ta edie deg ad des tins ate Alay 12 Knee Bolster uk DU Oe ER 48 52 Lane Change and Turn Signals 142 183 Lap Shoulder Belts llle 40 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 66 68 Latch Plate Lu dodenus 41 Latehes uie dS PII RISE SS Gok RU ee ae 76 Hood c cac m Rd ln I EAQUE ap dp 137 Lead Free Gasoline llle 307 Leaks Fld uas cedem RR adeo RR 76 Life Of Vitesse sack gael eee e e 295 Light Bulbs ud gus rtp hes 76 400 Light Repl
6. 0 000 eee 364 Recommendation sss 363 409 Synilietie sietas cr ee a Res eR RS oe dU RR E 364 VASCOSIEY uu ec ao e doe a na me es 363 409 Oil Filter Change 05 ccs ee m xn 365 Oil Filter Selection 0 00 0 0 eee eee 365 Oil Pressure Light ck giao aa be Red 177 Onboard Diagnostic System 357 358 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 155 Operating Precautions sera tastean eae ha 357 Outside Rearview Mirrors 20 97 Overdrive sies scs be ne Shae eed E ere a 260 Overheating Engine 0000000 336 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 428 Paint Cate ser eme e dace neteriaetne ia 387 Panic Alarm 2 222 eie che e E RI 25 Parking Brake ju use E ERES 264 Parking On Hill iem esce ERR HEIX ERR A 265 Passenger Seat Back Tilt Easy Entry System 133 Passing Lights ns cepa sese S034 RR EE RA 143 Personal Settings llle 194 PAS NNMERO MER 72 HO 446 INDEX MM Phone Cellular 99 217 218 Phone Hands Free UConnect 99 217 218 Placard Tire and Loading Information 284 Port Universal Serial Bus USB 213 217 USB ea a obrera ca has 213 217 Power Accessory Delay llle 12 Brakes lt 5 ci sk ba cx RERO CETT OS E OA 267 Deck Lid Release llle 36 Distribution Center Fuses ss 395 Door LOCKS 405 6604 hd eee RARE 30 MtfOIS use EY PRIORE he eee us 98
7. Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 4L and 2 7L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 5L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred for all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom
8. 177 High Beam Low Beam Select 142 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 299 Illuminated Entry senet ea piei err iia hS 20 Traction Control 0 0 6 ee eee 278 Instrument Cluster eile EE aest 138 TumSignal 76 138 142 183 402 404 Intensity Control 6 0 0 EEEa eee 144 Voltage TET 177 INtenOr ii ee XY resetea ear PES 144 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 176 License ud aes nrak apa dede A Giga UR a a 407 Loading Vehicle llle 319 321 Lights On Reminder sectes eii reneste sts 141 Capacities uns fei ees EDS daw pines ta 321 Low Fuel sc iecit asuen tna oa eS 177 inc PT 284 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 186 LOCKS 4 RO ee UR RR xe Rex 29 HO 44 INDEX ME Auto Unlock llle 31 Automatic Door llle 31 Door exer EET IUIUS Ie 29 Power Door 25262402208 menetan iidr de es 30 Low Tire Pressure System 0 299 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH i2 eae chee Tiniha de REQUE 66 68 Lubrication Body 0 eee 372 Lumbar Support 6 6 eee 132 Maintenance Free Battery 4 367 Maintenance General llle 361 Maintenance Procedures 000000 ee 361 Maintenance Schedule LL 414 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 186 358 Manual Service llle 428 Map Reading Lights 06 144 Master Cylinder Brakes
9. Cup Holders ME EM 164 Front Seat Cup Holder iius 164 Heated Or Cooled Cup Holder If Equipped 4 2 RR 164 Rear Seat Cup Holders 165 l Console Features ioo eR RR mm 166 Stor g 24 84 we x ues uc S XR ERR S RR 166 Sliding Armrest If Equipped 168 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 CONVERTIBLE TOP OPERATION WARNING The convertible top does not provide the structural protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection of the occupants of a vehicle in a collision Therefore it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts at all times when riding in a convertible Studies have shown that it is generally safer to remain inside a vehicle during a collision than to be ejected from the vehicle You can lower or raise the power convertible top from inside the vehicle or lower the top remotely using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Either operation takes approximately 30 seconds The entire process in cluding unlatching or latching the top at the windshield header is automatic The top does take up some space in the trunk when retracted However the trunk will still hold a significant amount of cargo When operating the power convertible top the trunk lid will pivot at the rear of the vehicle swing open by the rear window and then pivot backward This allows room for the top t
10. Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Y at a time Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Phonebook Enter Number New Entry Added 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on off Say 4 digit System Lists override pin code Phones Select phone ren p to be deleted ISP HOUSES P i Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e4 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Comma
11. SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 for more information If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message will display on the radio screen 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 for more information If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message w
12. 04 383 Memory Feature Memory Seat 133 Methanol o reete aS I eee E tea 309 Mini Irip Computer 52 249 RE eyed 190 MOS ere toca neeaae EE geod TRAE Na ER ES 96 Automatic Dimming 0 0 0 00 eee 96 Electric Powered 0 0 00 eee eee 98 Electric Remote 0 0 0 ee eee 98 Heated iio mk ee Shae S3 es 99 Outside laude ahead pue PRX ERES 97 MAE 2 63 cibus den oig nq bath adam ad eus 99 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 299 Mopar Parts sergeant Taeg e 360 426 MP3 Playet 2422 reme REC oe 213 217 MTBE E TBE 2 gad vacare ERG NUES 309 Multi Function Control Lever 5 138 Navigation Radio 0000 Pohto 217 Navigation System 0 0 00 e cece eee 217 New Vehicle Break In Period 0 0 72 en INDEX 445 Occupant Restraints 39 53 54 56 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 307 410 Odometer 0 cc ees 178 jm 178 180 Oil Change Indicator 179 189 414 Oil Change Indicator Reset 179 189 Oil Engine sacks m Reb ris esa s 361 410 Capacity seid eeu ehe erre 409 Change Interval 179 189 362 414 Checking exa pe mee EORR Re adus do 361 Dipstick 1 eosam siri es 361 Disposal iem d in a E ERR RR 364 Filler zia E Rue PT PP 365 410 Filter Disposal llle 364 Identification Logo llle 363 Materials Added to
13. 29 C ouaaa anaana 252 Mi AutoStick If Equipped If Engine Fails To Start 32 200o340224 44294 253 AutoStick Operation 4544241 9S re 9544s 263 After Starting 0 0 0 eee eee 254 AutoStick General Information 263 H Engine Block Heater If Equipped 255 W Parking Brake 2 c0s8c4a n 8 264 Bl Automatic Transaxle 0000 255 M Brake System 2 4 itu PORRRRRR CLR 267 Brake Transaxle Interlock System 256 Anti Lock Brake System If Equipped 268 248 STARTING AND OPERATING Se aps icc o ACE 270 Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 271 Acceleration ss ei ex eh bx ok nete eie dos 271 TRACHON sss ce a eet rade oe Ra eae does 271 Bl Driving Through Water 0 0 272 Flowing Rising Water 0 272 Shallow Standing Water 272 Mi Traction Control System TCS If Equipped 274 ll Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped 275 ll Electronic Stability Program ESP If Equipped isa essa mes 276 ESP Operating Modes 277 ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And ESP TCS Indicator Light 278 Synchronizing ESP 000 279 H Tire Safety Information 280 Tie Markings ee eR dee 280 Tire Identification Number TI
14. llus 319 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 5 2 285 319 321 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage vesa cse erect 243 400 Viscosity Engine Oil po dao cam nitats 363 Voice Recognition System VR 125 Warning Flasher Hazard 04 336 en INDEX 453 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 176 Warnings and Cautions 004 6 Warranty Information 000004 426 Washer Adding Fluid 149 374 Washers Windshield 146 149 374 Washing Vehicle i essari bo eee m E ed 388 Water Driving Through 000000 272 Wheel Alignment and Balance 297 Wheel and Wheel Trim llle 389 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 389 Wheel Bearings 2221 m nme 387 Wind Buffeting ise ER ER ee ee aes 36 Window Foggihg css caceseaoma i e ree as 244 WindOWS ciegas Rr ao MOR eae aR Re 32 liu eL LITE 32 Windshield Defroster 75 235 241 Windshield Washers 0 0055 146 149 Fluid 42 mu ha Be ae ER P RESISTE EES 374 Windshield Wiper Blades 373 Windshield Wipers 0 0000000 146 WindstOp eise oe oe a bd ba ee cee es Hated 88 Folding gig kr e e RR e 88 Wiper Blade Replacement 373 Wiper Delay icu taxes A ea e Nod e eed 147 Wipers Intermittent odes roadenn dat e o
15. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off position the recirculation feature will be cancelled In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or defrost floor mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recircula tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation Button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation Button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This t
16. Except California Emission States 312 E 85 General Information 312 Ethanol Fuel E 85 00 0 313 Fuel Requirements 0006 313 Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 314 OLaFHlp carus eas aca ah ade doe Mah eae doe d 315 Cruising Range 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000000 315 Replacement Parts llle 315 Maintenance 25a aces wa eR a eae ae d 315 B Adding Fuel 221 2222 tee Ra 316 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 316 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 318 IE Velicle Loading sync aga Peeee aed PARS ME 319 Vehicle Certification Label 319 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 319 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 320 Overloading isses ees 320 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings Trailer And Tongue Weight Towing Requirements Towing Tips ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground 250 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their se
17. Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 2 Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Tem perature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the Biai3cza desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O Off position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic operation Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects
18. The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 volt electrical outlets on this vehicle Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse The instrument panel power outlet located below the climate control knobs has power available only when the ignition is on This outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If desired the instrument panel power outlet The center console power outlet is powered directly from can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide the battery power available at all times Items plugged power with the ignition switch while in the LOCK into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent position engine starting Instrument Panel Power Outlet Console Interior es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER IF EQUIPPED An optional ash receiver is available from your autho e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw rized dealer and will fit in either one of the center console power from the vehicle s battery even when not in cup holders a use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine
19. Weather Strip Care Soft amp Hard Top Lubricate all top and door glass weather strips periodi cally with Mopar Weather Strip Lubricant part number 4773427 to keep them soft and pliable FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains fuses and relays Fuse and Relay Center TIPM 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 1 40 Amp Battery Feed 8 30Amp Ignition Off Draw Green Power Top Module Green IOD Sense 2 2 20 Amp 9 40 Amp Battery Feed Yellow Green Power Seats if 3 10 Amp Battery Feed Cen equipped Red ter High Mounted 10 20 Amp Battery Feed Cabin Stop Light CHMSL Yellow Compartment Node Brake Switch CCN 4 10 Amp Battery Feed Igni 11 15 Amp Selectable Power Out Red tion Switch Lt Blue let 5 20Amp Trailer Tow if 12 20 Amp Yellow equipped Yellow 6 10 Amp Power Mirror Switch 13 20 Amp Red Climate Controls Yellow 7 30Amp Ignition Off Draw 14 10 Amp Cabin Compartment Green IOD Sense 1 Red Node CCN Interior Lighting es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 Cavity Cartridge Mini Descripti
20. city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations AutoStick Selector Lever en STARTING AND OPERATING 263 AutoStick Operation AutoStick General Information By placing the selector lever one shift level below the D Drive position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears Moving the selector lever to the Left triggers a downshift and to the Right an upshift The gear If a ratio other than 1st is selected and the vehicle is position will display in the instrument cluster on the brought to a stop the transaxle control logic will transaxle range indicator automatically select the 1st gear ratio e You can start out in first or second gear The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed NOTE In Autostick mode the transaxle will only shift e Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy up or down when the driver moves the selector lever to conditions the Right or Left e Avoid using speed control when Autostick is en AutoStick is deactivated when the lever is shifted from gaged the AutoStick position into the Drive D position The transaxle will automatically shift up when maxi mum engine speed is reached while Autostick is engaged 264 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Transaxle shifting will be more noticeable when Autostick is engaged
21. API Certified 5 5 quarts 5 2 liters Cooling System 2 4L Engine Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile For 7 7 quarts 7 3 liters mula or equivalent 2 7L Engine Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile For 9 8 quarts 9 3 liters mula or equivalent 3 5L Engine Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile For 11 6 quarts 11 0 liters mula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Use API Certified engine oil SAE 5W 20 is recommended Refer to the en Engine Oil 2 4L amp 2 7L gine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Mate rial Standard MS 6395 Use API Certified engine oil SAE 10W 30 is recommended Refer to the Engine Coolant Engine Oil 3 5L engine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Oil Filter 2 4L Mopar 04884900AB or equivalent Oil Filter 2 7L amp 3 5L Mopar 04884899AB or equivalent es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Spark Plugs 2 4L ZFR5F 11 Gap 044 in 1 12 mm Spark Plugs 2 7L RE14PMC5 Gap 050 in 1 27 mm Spar
22. CO follow the safety tips below If you are required to drive with the trunk open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see you authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven we
23. Child Restraint llis 62 63 64 69 Extender rv eb eeu deb eS 48 Front Seat 2i eed ERG CER t EY 40 41 InsSpectiOn 4 sed eed ta exons RE bade es 75 Operating Instructions llle A1 Pr tensioners 2 29 WR ER d P EAE 45 RearS at duc esa ee WES EX 40 Reminder llle 177 Untwisting Procedure 005 44 Seals ence Sh eek EROR RR E SS EUR RU EUN 130 Adj stment 34 2 aw Re PAH des eta ae ai 130 Cleaning gatten megt pe tara ien ede coda 390 Easy Entty i9 de Dep ead obi ee 133 Head Restraints 0 000 eee 54 135 Heated eiue a heed eae 2h ee x3 135 Height Adjustment 000 134 L mbar Support eer mme PA aoe 132 Memory sacra eds S aie epe dea d are 133 POWO 463 24 ended edge RRR ee ROSA da 134 Reclining a fa ve asu EE PEE anes 131 Seatback Release 0 0 00 eee eee 133 Ting 2s an4vee serpii ae RR ee 134 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 376 410 Selection of Oil llle 363 Sentry Key Immobilizer 0 15 Sentry Key Programming 200 17 Service Assistance lees 423 Service Contract 3 924 ue pra pu PEU 425 Service Manuals eee ee eee 428 Setting the Clock creere srianag 196 200 215 218 settings Personal scs kr e te d 194 Shifting Automatic Transaxle llle 255 Shoulder Belts llle 40 en INDEX 449 SIde AID AG ois ecu ade He RI EE SU ER PES 54 Side View
24. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Manual Operation The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by This system offers a full complement of manual override rotating the Blower Control knob on the left features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details Automatic Temperature Control Operation 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Operation How Blower Control Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Auto Set mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature for 10 minutes knobs for comfort at a time Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Auto Set mode for 10 minutes knob to Auto Sct temperature at a ti
25. Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e Impact Sensors Two sensors located on the front body structure trigger airbag deployment in direct frontal impacts and aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to frontal impact events Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification e Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Side and Head Airbags Front seat mounted side and head airbags provide en hanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The seat mounted side and head airbags are marked with an SRS label sewn into the outboard side of the seat en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 81bca120 Seat mounted Side Airbag Label The ORC System deploys the seat mounted airbags dur ing a collision with other vehicles and during a collision where the impact is confined to a particular area of the vehicle such as a collision with poles trees or similar objects When the bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each bag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left bag only and a right side impact deploys only the right bag The following requirements must be
26. The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and when the accessory delay feature is active Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the win NOTE dows while operating the power window switches e The door window will lower slightly if it is closed Such entrapment may result in serious injury or completely when opening the door The window will death return to its fully closed position after closing the door This action allows the door to open without resistance and prevents window and top seal damage Auto Window Down If Equipped The front window controls on the driver and passenger e If a fluttering noise is heard from the rear seat belts door trim panels have an Auto Down feature These while driving with the windows down safely bring switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability the vehicle to a stop and buckle the rear seat belts over Push the window switch past the first detent release and the empty seats This will keep tension on the seat the window will go down automatically belts and remove the fluttering condition 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To open the window part way push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch either in
27. While stopped put transaxle in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 the fan control to High This allows the heater core to act WARNING asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling CAUTION coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Section 7 Maintenance of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle when safe Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Engine Only If pointer drops back into the normal range If the Equipped u 6 pointer remains on the H red mark for more than a During sustained high speed driving or trailer tow up 3 long gr
28. no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYS TEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 306 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire if so equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent i
29. 142 Flash T0 Pass n se 4 e au En RR ea EX ERAS 143 Flat Tire Changing llle 338 Flat Tire Stowage 0 0 6 cee 344 Flexible Fuel Vehicles llle 312 Cruising Range c RI RR SEEN a 315 Engine Oil i54 xa doe dete d eee 4 314 Fuel Requirements 312 313 Maintenance 26 246 e sg ys 312 315 Replacement Parts 0 00004 315 Star sie esta ced hod areal Bae Ra bated de eb bes 315 en INDEX 439 Flooded Engine Starting 4 253 Floor Console 0 0 0 0 ee eee 166 Fluid Btak 24a E de e he ES 412 Fluid Capacities llle 409 Fluid Leaks i ucc Re Rare ex 76 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle 384 385 Brake 2224 4 ke a9o454 ok bates 383 412 Cooling System marec taaga eee 376 Engine Oil iex ireti ee REOR Yos en 361 Power Steering uix isd a eee E aS es 371 412 Fluids lt 3 ede se sa d 6 Fok ee pai bea odes 410 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 410 Fog Light Service iue RERO AR 403 Fog Lights uer Rei 138 141 183 403 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 04 348 Front Wheel Bearings 00006 387 Fuel sicpx tosh cae dus oon ap ee ack e Ro du ds di 307 Adding ue Md Gas paci ae 316 Additives au ions ee doa UR Mae en Bae qU d 310 Clean Ait 2e eR 309 Ethanol ca RES ek hber ege ERES 309 Filler Cap Gas Cap 0 000 176 316 Filler Door Gas Cap 2 0 00 0000 ee 176 Gasoline ues Ce
30. 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee fuses Refer to Fuses in this manual for fuse location information See your authorized dealer for service Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deploy ment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers govern ment officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital
31. Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the eject button and the pushbutton with fy the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD 77 was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Press and hold the eject button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes SCAN Butto
32. Fuel Requirements 0005 307 J mp Starting 42 isa tice dea Gadages y ta 344 Oll c ovde ERR dusk 361 409 410 Oil Change Interval 179 189 362 414 Oil Filler Cap ss ces acere ees 354 355 356 363 Oil Filter 2 22 os hiat mrene e RES 365 Oil Filter Disposal tandasa tias 364 Oil Selection 2zezish re me e gs 363 409 HO 438 INDEX ae Oil Synthetie seas onec sor scere RO OR Eme 364 Operation 4 22 04 esata ee os eR 72 Overheating sse Ee bea ae aay 336 Stat hg sece ae eta e ied n emere ced der bh 251 Temperature Gauge 0 00000005 176 Engine Oil Viscosity 0 0 0 eee eee 363 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 58 Entry System Illuminated 20 Ethanol sek hh ERR eee aes 309 Event Data Recorder sati sai 60 Exhaust Gas Caution 04 74 311 375 Exhaust System 0 0 0 0000 e ae 74 374 Extender Seat Belt 0 0 0 0 0 000 cece eee 48 Exterior Light Service 000 cece cee ee 401 Exterior Lights i4 usus reu e 04548 rs 76 401 Fabrice Caie qrati tarere iki Go Aires 389 390 Filler Location Fuel 0 005 176 316 Filters Air Cleaner ue de oe ala bae eek 365 Air Conditioning sses pa aasia ain pa n ela 244 370 Automatic Transaxle aaraa 386 Engine Oll sssr ceed eR m Re 365 410 Engine Oil Disposal less 364 Flashers Hazard Warning eseis spriests 00 eee eee 336 Tum Signal 2 cscs i e mn 76
33. If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to the rev limit the transaxle will automatically select the next higher ratio If a downshift would cause the engine to over speed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine Mostly the transaxle will stay in the manually selected ratio however If the system detects powertrain overheating the transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off If the system detects a problem it will disable the AutoStick mode and the transaxle will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected PARKING BRAKE The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING Never use Park position on an automatic transaxle as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When parking on a flat surface place the gear selector lever in the P Park position first and then apply the parking brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 When parking on a hill it is important to apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector lever in P Park otherwise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
34. MAXIMUM SIZE DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY Ds AND STANDARDS a TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M e High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT E STARTING AND OPERATING 281 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design sta
35. Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the UConnect system ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers f
36. Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 161 Seats used bade RU Ed bh MRE bp ee PES 134 Steering s uk Ride deviated oon RONDE Gosia s 270 Steering Checking i22 Rees 371 WWII OWSG Genes ment nace Wortes dimid Liu 32 Power Steering Fluid iiaa 371 412 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 47 Preparation for Jacking 06 338 Pretensioners beat BES adunan s ste sock doen er we edu e doe 45 Programmable Electronic Features 194 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 00 21 Radial Ply Tires os gua mats eae soa ages 291 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 378 Radio Broadcast Signals 04 197 Radio Navigation 0 000000 ee 217 Radio Operation 0 214 218 231 Radio Remote Controls 06 230 Radio Satellite ems 213 214 217 218 225 Radio Sound Systems 00 213 217 Rear Cup Holder 52222 0 te ede diresti 165 Rear Wheel Bearings 0000005 387 Rear Window Defroster seuss tome cassat eses 246 en INDEX 447 Rear Window Features 0040 246 Reception Radio 2e 44 eid 23 Aa es 197 Recorder Event Data 00 00 cee eee 60 Recreational Towing 000000 333 Reformulated Gasoline 00040 309 Retrigerant jc ions dre VERS ee ees 370 Release Hood eee es 137 Reminder Lights On 00 00 0000 141 Reminder
37. RW button to move backward in the current track Holding the RW button long enough will take you back to the beginning of the current track Pressing and releasing the RW button will go back 5 seconds of the current track FF Fast Forward Button Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the current track Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward 5 seconds of the current track SEEK Buttons Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next track If the left down button is pressed during the first 2 seconds of the current track it will go back to the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the current track it will go back to the beginning of the track If the right up button is pressed during Play mode it will go to the next track in the list INFO Button Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the information Track Title Artist Album etc for that track Each press the INFO button will take you to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all of the screens the last press of the INFO button will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio REPEAT Button Press the REPEAT button to repeat the current playing track SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button will play the first 5 seconds of each track in the current list and then for
38. Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual The UConnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect system pairing instructions e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts e You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need
39. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 SALES CODE RER MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The RER multimedia system contains a radio Sirius Satellite Radio player Navigation system CD DVD player USB port 20 gigabyte Hard Drive HDD and the UConnect hands free Bluetooth cellular system NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnect the unit will respond with a Feature Not Available message when selecting controls related to this feature A 6 5 inch touch screen allows easy menu selection while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes more than 1 000 words for audio navigation entertainment and hands free mobile phone use The satellite navigation capability combines a Global Positioning System based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identifica tion selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations an
40. When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system amp ah meets the seat back and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at t
41. accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the ESP or TCS if equipped 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 19 Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system if equipped BRAKE The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Veh
42. after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death 2906 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics result ing in changes to s
43. and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes The battery is stored between the left front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield Access is through the splash shield Remote jump start terminals are located under the hood 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without allowing the vehicles to touch Set parking brake place automatic transaxle in PARK and turn ignition to LOCK for both vehicles WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads 4 Remove the protective cover over the remote jump start positive battery post in the engine compartment Connect one end of the jumper cable to the positive battery post Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery Jump Starting Location 6 If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi lizer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three seconds befo
44. and release this button to change the display from odometer to Trip A Press and release it a second time to change the display to Trip B Press and release it a third time to change the display back to the odometer To reset the trip odometer first display the trip mileage that you want to reset Trip A or Trip B Then push and hold the button approximately 2 seconds until the display resets to 0 The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer 17 Electronic Throttle Control Indicator Light This red illuminated light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing however see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running you may experience power loss an elevated rough idle and increased brake pedal effort and your vehicle may require towing Immediate service is required The light will come on when the ignition switch is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check This is normal If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 18 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If Equipped If this indicator light flashes during
45. be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in the transmitter The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a PN targeted range up to 35 ft 11 m 81b52cfe Remote Start Button 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transaxle to be equipped with Remote Start How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start Gear selector lever in PARK Doors closed Hood closed Trunk closed Hazard switch off Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Ignition key removed from ignition switch Battery at an acceptable charge level RKE Panic button not pressed To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the Remote Start button on 2 the RKE transmitter tw
46. can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder Belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a adjust the front seat seat belt properly 2 The seat belt latch plate is on the outboard side of the y It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or front seat next to your arm Grasp the latch plate and outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large
47. carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Vehicle Curb Weight 244 L Bas esa cesurca ada kars 3743 Ibs 1698 kg 24 15 Base 2s esce oh ake Is 3812 Ibs 1729 kg 24 L TOUTING cs EA a eae ds irass 2 7 L Limited 3 5 L Limited Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver s door 3874 Ibs 1757 kg 3960 Ibs 1796 kg 3847 Ibs 1745 kg The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehi
48. com e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions 430 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not includ
49. e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the system e The system remains armed during trunk entry Press ing the trunk button will not disarm the system If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e When the system is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The VSA system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred the system will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the system If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the system will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the system Tamper Alert If something has triggered the alarm in your absence and the warning signals have timed out the park and tail lights will flash three times when unlocking the vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The courtesy reading lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open either do
50. engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin Catalytic Converter ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing
51. filter 7 Install the A C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover CAUTION The A C Air Filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to install the filter properly will result in the need to replace it more often i 8 Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box A C Air Filter Replacement Power Steering Fluid Check 6 Remove the A C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined the housing service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Front Suspension Ball Jo
52. if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer under Instrument Cluster Descriptions in Section 3 of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the SAFE or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se Once a Month At Each Oil Change e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Change the engine oil filter damage e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required CAUTION e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and automatic trans ax
53. is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate Based on the sensor signals a central electronic ORC deploys the front airbags front seat mounted side and head airbags and front seat belt pretensioners as required for each type of impact The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position These include all of the items listed above except the steering wheel and column instrument panel and passenger knee bolsters If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that will deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The ORC also turns on the AIRBAG warning light in the instrument panel for six to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the AIRBAG warning light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up F It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster airbag warning light if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING
54. label you should deter mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 NOTE Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsi bility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunc
55. life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 3 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog light housing and rotate the connector 1 4 turn clockwise to lock it in place Tail Stop Light Rear Turn Signal Light Backup Light The taillights are a two piece design The tail stop lights and rear turn signal lights are located in the rear corner body panels The backup lights and rear fog lights are located in the trunk lid Changing the Tail Stop Light or Rear Turn Signal Light 1 Open the trunk ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 2 Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the taillight 4 Rotate the applicable bulb s electrical connector 1 4 housing turn counterclockwise and remove it from the taillight housing Location Plastic Wing Nuts tiber 3 Grasp the taillight housing with one hand on the 1 Tail Stop Light bottom of the housing and the other hand on the inboard 2 Turn Signal Light housing flange and pull it outward firmly to disengage the housing from the vehicle 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 6 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the taillight housing and rotate the connector turn clock wise to lock it in place 7 Reinstall the taillight housing Changing the Backup Light 1 Open the trunk 2 Rotate the bulb s electrical connector 14 turn cou
56. moving parts of the convertible top can injure a person or animal Never place any extremities hands feet etc near the convertible top components the upper windshield area the shelf area behind the rear seats or the convertible top stowage area while raising or lowering the convertible top When using the Power Top button on RKE transmitter if potential danger exists while lowering the top release the button immediately to interrupt the operation When using the Power Top switch on the instrument panel if potential danger exists while lowering the top press and release the switch immediately to interrupt the operation When using the Power Top switch on the instrument panel if potential danger exists while raising the top release the switch immediately to interrupt the operation Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top completely closed and latched or fully lowered into its stowage compartment Do not operate the Power Top when the vehicle is in motion Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the convert ible top components trunk contents and the vehicle interior ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Cargo Protector The cargo protector is located in the trunk Before low ering the convertible top you must unfold the cargo protector and seat the ta
57. mph 8 km h or greater NOTE You may need to be close to the vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the panic alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to SENTRY KEY Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your dealer for details Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 With the transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade tool to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal g 81182072 Battery Service 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the transmitter case snap the two halves together ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may
58. not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretens
59. now rated for E85 Ethanol ES use EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 For more information see Flexible Fuel in this section Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Metha nol 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ME MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under no
60. or downward without moving beyond the detent Check for a defective outside light bulb if either light remains on and does not flash or has a very fast flash rate If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator is defective Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch Push the Multi Function Control Lever away from you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam Pull the Lever toward you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the Multi Function Control Lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released 3 NOTE If the Multi Function Control Lever is held in the Flash to Pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds before activating the Flash to Pass function again Highbeam Functions 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Interior Lights Two courtesy reading lights are located in the bottom of the rearview mirror You can turn these lights on and off from the switches in the mirror or from the Dimmer Control in the Multi Function Lever These lights are also controlled automatically by the illuminated entry system 1 Left Lamp 2 Left Lamp Switch 3 Right Lamp Switch 4 Right Lamp A cour
61. or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connec tors disconnected for prolonged periods Maintenance Free Battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored in a compartment behind the left front fender and is accessible without removing the tire and wheel Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting To access the battery turn the steering wheel fully to the right and remove the inner fender shield 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive 4 and negative and ident
62. remove the ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the key ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of t
63. shift the gear selector lever from RE VERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting the gear selector lever into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal NOTE You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting the gear selector lever out of PARK 256 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Itis dangerous to shift the selector lever out of or if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should al ways shift the vehicle into PARK remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the selector lever is locked in the PARK position secur ing the vehicle against unwanted movement Fur thermore you should never leave children unat tended inside a vehicle Brake Transaxle Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out of P PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is ac
64. starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery Optional Cup Holder Ash Receiver 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION For vehicles equipped with the heated and cooled cup holder locate the cup holder ash receiver in the forward cup holder The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter Use the power outlet either in the cubby bin compart ment below the climate controls or in the console s bottom storage compartment to power this cigar lighter CUP HOLDERS Front Seat Cup Holder The cup holder in the center console will accommodate either two large size cups or two 20 oz liter bottles or cans The one piece insert can be removed easily for cleaning An optional removable ashtray may be located in one cavity of the cup holder Heated or Cooled Cup Holder If Equipped With this feature the rear cavity of the cup holder can keep cool beverages cool and hot beverages hot The rear cup holder heats to 140 F 60 C or cools to 35 F 1 6 C The switch is located on the front of the center
65. switch lock cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inop erable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se details refer to Key Off Power Delay under Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always in Section 4 of this manual remove key from the ignition and lock all doors WARNING when leaving the vehicle unattended Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving Key In Ignition Reminder children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a If you open the driver s door and the key is in the number of reasons A child or others could be seri ignition a chime will sound to remind you to
66. the bulb from the harness connector and then connect the replacement bulb 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlight housing and rotate it 1 4 turn clockwise to lock it in place Front Turn Signal Park Light 1 Open the hood 2 Rotate the bulb s electrical connector 4 turn counter clockwise and remove it from the headlight housing 81b71ee8 Front Turn Signal Park Light ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 3 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlight housing and rotate the connector 1 4 turn clock wise to lock it in place Front Fog Light NOTE Access to the lights through the lower fascia cutout is limited We recommend you access the lights by turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove the inner fender shield 1 Rotate the bulb s electrical connector 4 turn counter Front Fog Light clockwise and remove it from the fog light housing 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
67. the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your vehi cle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination ie fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami nated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lockup and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 WARNING e Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lockup and stall out and leave you stranded F
68. the rearward facing direction than who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing than one year These child seats are also held in the by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child less than one year old Both types of child restraints are restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to CHildren in this section 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion while the child s back is against the seat back then the child should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap portion Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in t
69. the up or down direction and release the switch For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For details refer to Key Off Power Delay under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Auto Window Up If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To cancel the Auto Up movement operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 NOTE ANTI PINCH PROTECTION e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly duri
70. to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN number You will not need to remember this PIN number after the initial pairing process es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 with 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect system The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity Dial by Saying a Number Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say s 2 The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination Based on the country in which the ve hicle was purchased the U
71. to the vehicle s UCI connector which is located in the glove box on some vehicles This location may vary with vehicle Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle system this may take a few seconds to connect the vehicle brand logo appears on the iPod display and it starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below Controlling the iPod using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode the iPod audio track if available from iPod will start playing over the vehicle audio system 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod will be in Play mode In this Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data TUNE SCROLL Knob Use the TUNE SCROLL knob to go to the next or previous track The TUNE SCROLL knob functions similar to the scroll wheel on the iPod mobile digital device Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first 2 seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list and turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track RW Rewind Button Press and hold the
72. use it before you buy it Before buying any restraint system make sure that it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e All passenger seating positions contain automatic locking retractors However any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts The two rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments or fixed lower attachments Regardless of the spe
73. when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Headlights with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center in Section 4 of this manual Headlight Time Delay If Equipped This feature is particularly useful when exiting your vehicle in an unlit area It provides the safety of headlight illumination for about 90 seconds after turning the igni tion switch to the LOCK position To activate the delay turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when you turn off the headlights Only the headlights will illuminate during this time If you turn the headlights parking lights or ignition switch on again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Headlights Off Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Daytime Running Ligh
74. 00 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Lock Your Vehicle Always remove the keys fr
75. 000 30 y 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES xg N Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage l are listed follow the interval that occurs first M Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Replace the spark plugs on 2 4L engines except 30 000 50 000 30 fey PZEV engine E i i z Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt ten 30 000 50 000 30 Py sion on 2 4L engines C Inspect the generator belt on 2 4L engines and replace 30 000 50 000 30 n if necessary ny Change the automatic transaxle fluid amp filter if using IM your vehicle for any of the following police taxi 60 000 100 000 60 a fleet or frequent trailer towing E Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessary 90 000 150 000 90 8 Flush and replace the engine coolant 100 000 160 000 60 Replace the spark plugs on 2 4L PZEV 2 7L and 102 000 170 000 102 3 5L engines Replace the power steering pump belt on 2 4L engines 102 000 170 000 102 Replace the generator belt on 2 4L engines 102 000 170 000 102 en MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 419 Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Replace the timing belt on 2 4L and 3 5L engines 102 000 170 000 102 Change the automatic transaxle fluid amp filter 120 000 200 000 120 Replace the accessory drive b
76. 0Amp Ignition Run Stability Program Yellow Heated Seats if ESP Module if equipped equipped 31 10 Amp Red ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse 35 40 Amp Battery Feed Anti e When installing the Totally Integrated Power Green Lock Brakes ABS Module cover it is important to ensure the cover is Module if properly positioned and fully latched Failure to equipped Electronic do so may allow water to get into the Totally Stability Program Integrated Power Module and possibly result in TEL Medile i an electrical system failure equipped 36 30 Amp Battery Feed Pas When replacing a blown fuse it is important to Pink senger Door Module use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating PDM Driver Door The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated Module DDM may result in a dangerous electrical system over 37 25 Amp Battery Feed load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it Clear Power Top Module indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery You may e Remove the IOD Ignition Off Draw mini fuses from the Totally Integrated Power Module located in the engine compartment e Or disconnect the batter negative cable REPLAC
77. 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is driven at least 15 miles 24 km Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips Cold fluid is at a temperature below 80 F 27 C 7 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Then remove dipstick and note the reading a If the fluid is hot the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT between the upper two holes in the dipstick b If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be between the lower two holes in the area marked COLD If the fluid level is low add sufficient fluid through the filler dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level Do not overfill 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts for the correct fluid type Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is re seated properly Fluid and Filter Changes Change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter at the intervals shown in the Maintenance Sc
78. 40 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 425 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Ser
79. 435 Cleaning Wheels 443 240000548004 Ca 4b ban Med 389 Windshield Wiper Blades 373 Climate Control 00 00 00 eee eee 232 Clock zac ce SER bes 196 200 215 218 Coin Holder 21 524 cm ER eS YE 166 Cold Weather Operation 04 252 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 231 Compact Spare Tire 0 00 ec eee 292 Compass isse e eR E bia Chee A eed d 191 Compass Calibration llle 192 Compass Variance llle 192 Computer Trip Travel llle 190 Connector UCI ech ne eee tobe He eS ee eee eS 221 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 221 Console Floor camie a si e E e ees 166 Contract Service des ees 425 Converter Catalytic ics aereis res 366 Convertible es cs Rss edna e a 81 Convertible TOp 42d eren hae e 81 Convertible Top Maintenance 393 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 378 Cooler Beverage Holder Cup Holder 164 Cooling System ss seat exce E es 375 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 377 Coolant Capacity eee eee 409 Coolant Level 0 0 00 0000 376 379 Disposal of Used Coolant 379 Drain Flush and Refill 376 Inspection 2 6 eee eee 379 Points to Remember 00 379 Pressure Cap is ise e RUE ERA S 378 Radiator Cap esa 4 5 se ne Ye pde a eec 378 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 376 409
80. 56 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 A AEN 12 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 ME 24 22 05 16 112 96 80 64 y 56 48 WMA Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 WMA 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL con
81. 8 Traction Grades lslleln 429 E Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades 00 430 Quality Grades sss eee Rees 429 TreadWear cvgoxo Cu See ex aod 429 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 423 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must
82. 9 GROUND EE BRAKES B LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN C PINS 812634c6 PARK 7 Pin Connector Towing Tips GND MALE PIN Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic 813262be Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working 4 Pin Connector properly including hazard flashers 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Towing Tips Automatic Transaxle The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the auto matic transaxle fluid and filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual NOTE Check the automatic transaxle fluid level before towing Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control
83. ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ME If both the Brake System Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the Anti Lock brakes ABS and Elec tronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS system is required POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold
84. Connect system limits the user from dialing an invalid combinations of numbers For example in the U S A 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid U S A phone number the closest valid phone number has 10 digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Call by Saying a Name Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phonebook The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert in
85. Corrosion Protection Cruise Control Speed Control Cruise Light 436 INDEX ME Cup 0 0 ae eem Rm Rem 164 392 Heated Cooled Beverage Holder 164 Customer Assistance 0 0 0 eee 423 Customer Programmable Features 194 Data Recorder Event llle 60 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 145 Daytime Running Lights 140 Deal rS rvic caer ERR 360 Deck Lid Emergency Release 38 Deck Lid Power Release 00004 36 Defroster Rear Window 246 Defroster Windshield 75 235 241 Delay Intermittent Wipers 147 Deploying Aiubag e ieies bsica eee Rowe EEA ed 53 Diagnostic System Onboard 357 Digital Video Disc DVD Player 213 217 Dimmer Control lees RR RR RR 144 Dimmer Switch Headlight 142 Dipsticks Automatic Transaxle 0 0 384 385 Oil Engine 3er a eho a a ha E DAR 361 Disabled Vehicle Towing llle 349 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 379 Engine Oil isses me e eg 364 Door LOCKS pdun enrama pand Rem Gates 29 Door Locks Automatic sse 31 Door Opener Garage ceio mie Trbaru hE 155 Drive Belis sicrisrsaneriera RS be RES 365 Driver s Seat Back Tilt 2205 133 Driving On Slippery Surfaces s cesser erroria siais 271 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing
86. DECK Continuous DECK Continuous Single The Trunk Lid is The Top Will AJAR ous Chime Unlatched or Not Operate Open Unless the Trunk Lid is Closed CONVERT 6 Seconds TOP FAIL Display Scrolls TOP 6 Seconds Single The PTCM Acti Refer to Foot IBLE TOP for 6 Seconds Chime vated the System Note MALFUNC LOCKOUT Fea TION ture CONVERT Until Fault TOP FAIL Display Scrolls TOP Display Single The PTCM Acti See your au IBLE TOP is No until Fault is Flashes un Chime vated the System thorized dealer MALFUNC Longer De No Longer De til Fault is LOCKOUT Fea for service TION tected or tected or Re No Longer ture Repaired paired Detected or Repaired es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 If so equipped For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC The PTCM will LOCKOUT the power convertible top system if the vehicle charging system is malfunc tioning or the battery is run down or the hydraulic pump is overheating In addition the system prohibits low ering the top when ambient temperature is at 0 F 18 C or lower and raising the top when ambient temperature a is below 40 F 40 C e If you are trying to lower the top and ambient temperature is 0 F 18 C or lower wait until the temperature rises and the top is thawed and dry before operating the Power Top If you are trying to raise the top and ambient temperature is below 40 F 40 C wait until the temperature rises before o
87. EMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Front Courtesy Reading Lights LED Dealer Service Center Console Courtesy Light 578 W5W Glove Box Light 22e cere EEREREX ES 194 Rear Compartment Trunk Light 579 NOTE For lighted switches see your dealer for replace ment instructions LIGHTS BULBS Outside Bulb No Low Beam Headlight 00040 9006 High Beam Headlight 00 9005 Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker Light 3457AK Front Fog Light i c ess see Rh 9145 H10 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL W16W 921 Rear Tail Stop sese br ph Rye bees 3057 Decklid Tail Light 2D 13 25 Rear Turn Signal llle 3757A Backup Light sis ce nn 3157K License Light 4 exea se he ERROR RR 168 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight 1 Open the hood NOTE It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner filter housing and position the totally integrated power module aside prior to replacing the low beam headlight on the driver s side of the vehicle 2 Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly from the headlight housing 81b71ee4 1 High Beam Headlight 2 Low Beam Headlight 3 Disconnect
88. ENU Commands The Voice Recognition System understands two types of commands Global commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key 2 Say a command e g HELP es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the voice recognition system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is different then the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key You may say MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e RADIO to switch to the radio mode e DISC to switch to the disc mode e MEMO to switch to the memo recorder Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave if equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or RADIO AM In this mode you may say the following commands e FREQUENCY to change the frequency e NEXT STATION to select the next station e PREVIOUS STATION to select the previous station e RADIO MENU to switch to the radio menu e MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or RADIO FM In this mode you may say the following commands e FREQUENCY to change the frequency e NEXT STATION to select the next station e PREVIOUS STATION to select the previous station e RAD
89. FORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or both doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the transmitter To change the cur rent setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Flash Lights with Lock The feature will cause the turn signal lights to
90. Ft 2 0 Sq M 2000 Ibs 900 kg 200 Ibs 90 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds 1 The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Section 5 of this manual Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front shields guards are not recommended for use with 2 7L engine with automatic transaxle Please refer to the following website http www 5 chrysler com searchapp ui jsp or your dealer for additional informa tion 326 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or cause severe engine damage under extreme conditions Trailer and Tongue Weight Tow A Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in HEIGHT the front of the trailer This places 10 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear cancause Consider the following items when computing the the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause Weight on the rear axle of the vehicle loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicl
91. G AND OPERATING ME When in Partial Off mode the engine torque reduction feature is cancelled Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable However a fea ture of the system remains active This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning m bank above the climate controls To turn the ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch again This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation This may be done while the vehicle is in motion To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch in the switch WARNING In the Partial Off mode the engine torque reduction is cancelled and the stability features are desensi tized Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability of fered by ESP is unavailable ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 The system wi
92. INING YOUR VEHICLE Se Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill The system should be drained flushed and refilled at the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 of this manual If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct coolant type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 Adding Coolant no Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles 160 000 km before replacemen
93. IO MENU to switch to the radio menu e MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say SAT or SATELLITE RADIO In this mode you may say the following com mands e CHANNEL NUMBER to change the channel by its spoken number e NEXT CHANNEL to select the next channel PREVIOUS CHANNEL to select the previous chan nel e LIST CHANNEL to hear a list of available channels e SELECT NAME to say the name of a channel e RADIO MENU to switch to the radio menu e MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say DISC In this mode you may say the following commands e TRACK to change the track e NEXT TRACK to play the next track e PREVIOUS TRACK to play the previous track e MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say MEMO In this mode you may say the following commands e NEW MEMO to record a new memo During the recording you may press the VR hard key to stop recording You continue by saying one of the following commands SAVE to save the memo es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 CONTINUE to continue recording DELETE to delete the recording e PLAY MEMOS to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the VR hard key to stop playing memos You continue by saying one of the fo
94. IRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET A WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM Hi 3 2005 Ot any M awp srake WINDSHIELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REARFOGLANP AND LIFTGATE DEFROSTAND VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOURWHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE as m rria X9 mb 3l i ae TOW LJ HAUL VOICE BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIRCONDITIONING __ CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON C8 F er 2 i OR 60 pr tr3 Low LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDINGDOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER ANDTETHERFOR UGONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE Low C ES d a mw bo i MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S 8191e970 INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO Li 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual
95. IVER AIRBAG PASSENGER AIRBAG Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the seat airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be KNEE BOLSTER P pushed into you causing serious injury Do not attach cup holders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating seat airbag could drive NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal the object into occupants causing serious injury regulations that allow less forceful deployment Front Airbag Components Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in The front airbags have a dual stage inflator design This any way may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such that are based on collision severity and occupant size as alarm lights stereos citizens band radios etc 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Along with seat belts and pretensioners front airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protec tion for the driver and front passenger Seat airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection While the seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions the front airbags will deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and seat airbags may be trig gered However even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to k
96. Mirror Adjustment 97 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 244 Signals Tut cess eR Ren 76 142 404 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 271 Snow Chains Tire Chains leues 297 Snow Tres gesp kRS E eR RU Rub RR 298 Sound Systems Radio 213 217 Spare Tire essct BRE E anei 292 293 339 Spark Plugs usse cet cule emer 365 410 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 0 ee 410 Qil eberr esadi adt ra RE do Rae 363 410 Speed Control Cruise Control 151 180 Speedometer cid e eade Chea eae ex 176 viri Giese vente iad aides Sepa ae eat cea 27 251 Cold Weather 2 2 0 00 eee eee ee 252 Emergency Jump Starting 344 Engine Fails to Start REMOTE ke ace ace I gae OR hae dona 27 Starting and Operating sesa imee escea siias 251 Starting Procedures 0 000000 251 Steering Column Lock sess peda kk Rer 150 Linkage aedes 4 mite aes aa PRE OTA 372 POW gece 2 bea twa ae E RACER CERE 270 371 T Colum soe cag cis eek Re Eg 150 Wheel Tilt 2222 e RR x 150 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 2 0 ees 230 DLOTAZE eue oe ae he ded ae E E ere teh dud 166 400 storage Vehicle 55 i16sco s de RR S Rn 243 Stuck Freeing idee tek EAE 348 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 48 54 Synthetic Engine Oil 2 2 6 2 eee System Navigation 0 000s esas System Remote Starting 450 INDEX Sa Tachometer
97. Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode a No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped in Section 3 of this manual for detailed operating instructions For UConnect Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 of this manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copy
98. N 283 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 284 Bl Tires General Information 288 Tire Pressure uy x ETE PP 288 Tire Inflation Pressures 000 289 Radial Ply Tites 22e 9e RP 291 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 292 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 293 TireSpinning ism ee RE a 294 Tread Wear Indicators lesen 294 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 Lite OF Wire ue ack He alan Deets Bake ae Aces 295 Replacement Tires 0000050 296 Alignment And Balance 297 E Gre Chains 0 2 ees 297 la snow lites ressis dredi penp EAE 298 H Tire Rotation Recommendations 298 H Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS If Equipped i is sae a e men 299 Base System If Equipped 302 Premium System If Equipped 304 General Information 307 Mi Fuel Requirements 0000 eens 307 2 4L And 2 7L Engines 0000 307 9L Eneine issu dae Male ae ae eines 308 Reformulated Gasoline lues 309 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 309 MMT In Gasoline 0000000005 310 Materials Added To Fuel 310 Fuel System Cautions Carbon Monoxide Warnings lll Flexible Fuel 2 7L Engines Only
99. NEL 245 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise position Press the 4 VERY HOT button Set the Mode control at or between 4 and 53 Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the Ic button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the gt button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the G5 button to turn recirculate off If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near a COOL OR COLD Press the G5 button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between lt 4 and J then turn the air 6468 conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 6 TL C the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between 3 Jand Sp COLD DRY Set the Mode control at ot near 4 If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control a
100. NG You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dips
101. NT POWER AUTOMATIC PRESSURE STEERING TRANSAXLE CAP FLUID DIPSTICK POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER COOLANT BOTTLE BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR WASHER FLUID BOTTLE FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE 81ad955b ENGINE ENGINE OIL AIR CLEANER OIL FILL DIPSTICK FILTER 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 5L ENGINE COMPARTMENT COOLANT POWER COOLANT PRESSURE STEERING BRAKE FLUID BOTTLE CAP FLUID RESERVOIR WASHER FLUID BOTTLE FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE 81ad9563 ENGINE ENGINE OIL AIR CLEANER OIL FILL DIPSTICK FILTER ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transaxle control systems When these systems are oper ating properly your vehicle will provide excellent per formance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause
102. ON Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in step 3 3 There is one front jacking location and one rear jacking location on each side of the vehicle The front locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts the rear ones by two rectangular cutouts For vehicles equipped with plastic trim the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking locations in the body Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel covers if equipped off the hub Install the spare wheel ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343 and wheel nuts with the cone shaped e
103. Press the switch to the second detent and release it The system will lower all four windows and the top to their fully retracted positions Using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter 1 Press and release the Unlock button 2 Press release then press and hold the ZA Power Top button down until the operation of lowering the top and all four windows to their fully retracted positions is complete NOTE If you release the Power Top button before fully retracting the top you must repeat steps 1 and 2 above to resume lowering the top Raising the Power Convertible Top Using the Power Top Switch NOTE The Power Top switch will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and when in the power accessory delay 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Press and hold the switch in the Top Up CC position until the operation of raising the top and latching it is complete which is indicated by the system raising the windows and dis playing TOP DONE in the odometer or CONVERT IBLE TOP COMPLETE in the EVIC if equipped Using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter You cannot use the Power Top button on the RKE transmitter to raise the power convertible top You must use the Power Top switch inside the vehicle to perform this operation Manually Closing the power convertible top manually is a compli cated and physically demanding procedure and it re quires a special t
104. R VEHICLE 59 Airbag Warning Light NS You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system immediately Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service If your seat includ e The AIRBAG warning light does not come on during ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is in any way including removal or loosening first turned on tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer ap proved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons e The light comes on and remains on while driving with disabilities contact your authorized dealer The light remains on after the six to eight second interval NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the ORC may also be NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown
105. SA wae eee eee wie e e 307 Gauge os cing dee ek ees e RUE Ea ses 176 brc PL LT 381 Light 2zucaca ama e3RRD RR 177 Materials Added llle 310 Methanol 3 625 ER RE CR pP EEEREN ERU 309 Octane Rating 0 cece 307 410 Requirements 22 09 iddetune ois Pre tunes 307 Specifications oeeie REX Waa S 410 Tank Capacity ai exe dias ba ested aces 4 409 Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fuel System Caution ssas sesia sara penssi 317 Fueling eese ete dom ee Ronan t Hee SE 316 440 INDEX aa Garage Door Opener HomeLink 155 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 316 318 358 Gasoline Clean Air ee 309 Gasolne Euel sa22254hs4 4 05 ho8 ated b4 307 Gasoline Reformulated 309 Gauges Coolant Temperature llle 176 l3 176 Odometer vizcz c Se Cea POR CEA 178 Tachometer exea E EEPA YA G 178 Gear Ranges oesoem etii a hag per eroe ES 258 Gearshift s pinag eenei enaa es PY ed es 258 General Information 18 27 125 263 307 General Maintenance 00 0000 eee 361 Glass Cleaning s sex CPU Spes ohana tow RES 391 Gross Axle Weight Rating 320 323 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 319 322 GVWR 5 sss a ced are Rah Sees dS 319 Hands Free Phone UConnect 99 217 218 Hard Drive HDD zem ees 213217 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 06 272 H
106. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS E INTRODUCTION eek mex m Uer EP ceew e eile oe e x ENERE EENET E T CE E e 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE eee ht tmn 8 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee nnn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 ccc eccc cece eee hh tn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc eer cece c cece reer hh hh hh hn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 cece cece cece cece eee e eee e cere hh hn nn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 ccc cee istsr a cece c ccc hh hh mh hn 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2c cece cece creer cece ehh hh hh 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 0 cc ceccccccccccc eevee ecvcecvcesvces 10 INDEX 4g 55 50 EE INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction anaa auaa ee 4 W Vehicle Identification Number 6 Bl How To Use This Manuadl ss 4 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 H Warnings And Cautions 0 6 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE Afte
107. Seat Belt 0 00005 45 46 Remote Control Secunty Alarm ias ed or eere ed pu Eee 18 Starting System 2 6 sees ehe 27 Remote Keyless Entry RKE o secese se senters 21 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 230 Remote Starting System 0 0 0 0 00 27 Remote Trunk Release canastairean dasa 36 Replacement Bulbs 000006 400 Replacement Keys llle 16 Replacement Parts Replacement Tires llle 296 Reporting Safety Defects 00 427 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 179 189 Restraint Head 0 0 eee eee 54 135 Restraints Child 0 0 00 0 62 Restraints Occupant 0000 39 54 Reverse Lights 1522 aici dete ser Rape eund 404 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 348 Rotation Tires llle 298 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 75 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 75 Safety Defects Reporting 427 Safety Exhaust Gas c ok ee Re 74 Safety Information Tire 00 280 Safety TIPS sis gota ata a Rie ma eot Ke ean as 73 Satellite Radio 213 214 217 218 225 Satellite Radio Antenna 0 226 Schedule Maintenance llle 414 448 INDEX MM Seat Belt Maintenance 0000 ee nee 392 Seat Belt Reminder less 45 46 Seat Belts 452 d dak acer as Ea RN 39 40 75 And Pregnant Women sess 47
108. Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code and REQ radios only with UConnect For sales code REN touch screen radio refer to the separate User s Manual This feature allows you to plug in an iPod mobile digital device into the vehicle s sound system through a connec tor UCI connector using an optional connection cable available through Mopar See your authorized dealer for details Using this feature e the iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata Track Title Artist Al bum etc information display on radio e the iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e the iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector Connecting the iPod Device Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod
109. Speed Control Operation 151 Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch 142 To Actvdte 2 4 46 24404 ace REG ES Flash To Pass ee vere Redes 143 To Set At A Desired Speed Interior Lights iru ys ree hs 3 144 To Deactivate 6 smat rias ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 146 To Resume Speed 49v bex4 9e 153 Intermittent Wiper System 147 To Vary The Speed Setting 153 Mist Feature sp sace ce dore er Ee e 148 To Accelerate For Passing 154 Headlights With Wipers Available With ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 155 Auto Headlights Only 148 Programming HomeLink 156 Windshield Washers lesus 149 Gate Operator Canadian Programming 159 Adding Washer Fluid ls 149 Using HomeLink eese 160 B Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 150 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button 160 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee DeCUTILY is o ee A aeg RP Roe o B X Rede doe a Troubleshooting Tips llle General Information 000 Bi Electrical Power Outlets lll Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off H Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver It Equipped syrien cndgvie ake ede eas awe Cup Holder Ash Receiver If Equipped 160 160 161 161 163 163 163
110. VEHICLE Se 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat b
111. W BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Child Restraint sess cose ad cen Reeds ee 62 Exhaust Gas ee ae ae Se ae es 74 H Engine Break In Recommendations 72 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The MSafety Tips iilis 73 VEEE asipi spits inne ne te sid T ne P 73 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make S ae E ae Outside The Vehicle psv sisas rpsr cridas 75 Lock Your Vehicle 4 as wes RR 73 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can either side up be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer Ask your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place Ignition Key Removal Place the selector lever in PARK Turn the key to the ACC position and then push the key inward slightly and turn the key to the LOCK position Then remove the key 81ae0ece Vehicle Key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 80e54ed7 Ignition Key Positions NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the selector lever in PARK the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition
112. Water sess acre eere RR RA 272 E85 Fuel 12 eset aoa c Re don S aa e 312 Electric Rear Window Defrost 246 en INDEX 437 Electric Remote Mirrors 0 000000 ee 98 Electrical Power Outlets 00005 161 Electronic Brake Control System Brake Assist System 0000005 275 Electronic Stability Program 276 Traction Control System llle 274 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 151 Electronic Stability Program ESP 276 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 187 Emergency Deck Lid Release 38 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 348 Hazard Warning Flasher 336 Jacking nw be eek Ca a a Ss eas ta 338 Jump Starting sse beta es yw ned 344 Overheating ies di acu Galas de ihe e 336 TOWING bad tbe seed ue habits a es 349 Emergency Trunk Release 0 38 Emission Control System Maintenance 358 414 Engine oos RR Ud TUER 72 354 355 356 Air Cleaner 22 222 Re 365 Block Heater sc RR akina kaam 255 Break In Recommendations 72 Checking Oil Level 0000 361 Compartment siari eenia a ane a eee eee eee 354 Coolant Antifreeze 00 376 410 COO Tg us emp adeeuteg s Ages ota eden 375 Exhaust Gas Caution 0005 74 311 Fails to Start zu uve eee RR CH AS A 253 Flooded Starting lllsllleses 253
113. Y See your local authorized dealer 7 Airbag Light The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8 9 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light does not UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 come on during starting stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer 8 Theft Alarm Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the alarm system is arming The light will begin to flash slowly indicating that the system is armed 9 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will come on for about six seconds A chime will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt out of the retractor This is a reminder to buckle up If you do not buckle up the light will remain on 10 Oil Pressure Light S271 Shows low engine oil pressure The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON position and the light 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss will turn off after the engine is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light comes on and remains on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine This can be determined using the procedure sh
114. a Fs 374 Cooling System sss epo RE da 375 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 381 Fuel Systemi 5 cas dor ain hie andy as aS Fees 381 Brake System 25 esa bes padad ex E ES 381 Automatic Transaxle 000 384 Front And Rear Wheel Bearings Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders ll Convertible Top Care Soft Top Weather Strip Care Soft amp Hard Top ll Fuses Totally Integrated Power Module li Vehicle Storage li Replacement Bulbs 2 uk Ren ll Bulb Replacement Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight Front Turn Signal Park Light ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 Front Fog Light 2 cse m bens oe ae 403 W Fluids And Capacities isses 409 Tail Stop Light Rear Turn Signal Light Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 410 d LE s Engine een 410 License Plate Light sser pei Sant oa esai 407 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 408 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 4L ENGINE COMPARTMENT POWER AUTOMATIC POWER STEERING TRANSAXLE SERIE DISTRIBUTION FLUID DIPSTICK CENTER COOLANT BOTTLE AIR FUSES TOTALLY CLEANER INTEGRATED FILTER POWER MODULE 81ad9553 WASHER FLUID BOTTLE ENGINE OIL RADIATOR ENGINE DIPSTICK CAP OIL FILL ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 2 7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT COOLA
115. a Nostalea Music Type information Oldi oe Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following Personality Persnlty format types Public Public Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Rhythm and Blues R amp B No program type or Nowe Religious Music Rel Musc undefined Religious Talk Rel Talk Classical Classicl Soft Soft Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Rock Soft Rck College College Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Country Country Sports Sports Foreign Language Language Talk Talk Information Inform Top 40 Top 40 Ppa 9 20 er Jazz Jazz Weather Weather News News es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You c
116. a proper restraint for the child s Size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Infants and Child Restraints LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower e Safety experts recommend that children ride a ee eon rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe carriers and convertible child seats injury or death to infants in this position e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the Older Children and Child Restraints vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats canbe older than one year can ride forward facing in the used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher seats used in the forward facing direction are for children weight limit in
117. acement 0000000 401 ghis e coctus sins hae eco Pied es 76 138 401 Apap cc ree cer ER ht rs 52 53 59 75 177 AntLOck ruga khe usse ai nube tle 269 Automatic Headlights llle 139 Back pie osse anao sco qa es cia eats 404 Battery gaVer zie uS E ve TRUE ARS 4 144 Brake Assist Warning lille 278 Brake Warning 0 eee eee 182 Bulb Replacement 4 4 3440 de404 404 401 Center Mounted Stop nakataas 408 Courtesy Reading s ere e gm 144 Daytime Running 0000 00 140 Dimmer Switch Headlight 138 142 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator i23 acc cu ededruex XA v ea RE 276 278 en INDEX 443 Engine Temperature Warning 178 Map Reading serer ce RR Rh n 144 EXtefiOE sen eere e I eed d 76 Oil Pressure eem t eit Ret in 177 FOR cu suberunbaos d kA ed aT Ro edd 141 183 403 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 145 Hazard Warning Flasher 336 o P CET 138 139 Headlight Switch llus 138 139 PaSSINE p PET PEE 143 Headliglits cemere RR eer 139 401 RearServicing e ee 401 404 Headlights On Reminder 141 Rear Tail oiuuotepehderd es end Riera tac 404 Headlights On With Wipers 139 148 Seat Belt Reminder less 177 HighBeam saratna eeii peaa 142 401 SEVICE aa neces kiana E ante 400 401 High Beam Indicator lille ss 186 Theft Alarm Security Alarm
118. ades on hot day the engine oil temperature ma te turn th ff diately and call f 58 y 8 P y Dus ES MMC E E become too hot If this happens the HOTOIL message flashes the vehicle speed will be reduced to 53 mph 85 km h until the engine oil temperature is reduced NOTE Engine speed is reduced to 53 mph 85 km h at the maximum You may of course reduce your speed further if needed 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Preparations For Jacking WARNING 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the areas vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when 2 Set the parking brake and place the gear selector in operating the jack or changing the wheel PARK automatic transaxle or REVERSE manual trans Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous axle The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start 4 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If D you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a 5 Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the service center where it can be raised on a lift vehicle is being jacked T
119. age on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect system and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entr
120. ags room to inflate 4 If your vehicle has seat airbags do not lean against the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Seat airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller ORC AIRBAG Warning Light Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Supplemental seat side Thorax and head airbags Front Impact Sensors Side Impact Sensors If Equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Seat Belt Reminder Light e Knee Impact Bolsters e Driver and Front Passenger Se
121. ailure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM TCS IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if the ESP is in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Pro gram ESP in this Section of the manual m The Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin This indicates that the TCS is active If the indicator light flashes during accel eration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING e The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the trac
122. an toggle between gt Il playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped e VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to custom
123. and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corporation to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation DaimlerChrysler Corporation product involving a 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically co
124. and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjust the restraint so that the upper edge is as high as practical To raise it pull upward on the head restraint To lower it depress the button on the post guide and push downward on the head restraint 81b7959a Adjustable Head Restraint Heated Seats If Equipped Heated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold days and can help soothe sore muscles and backs The driver and front passenger seats are heated The controls for each heater are located in the Instrument Panel Switch Bank above the climate controls After turning on the ignition you can choose from High Off or Low heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for high one for low and none for off 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against
125. anually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the United States of America and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the United States of America 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside
126. ar patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Lights Fluid Leaks Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel while you work the controls Check turn signal and high engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline beam indicator lights on the instrument panel fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be Doat Latches located and corrected immediately Check for positive closing latching and locking UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Convertible Top Operation 81 MMi 2 0 RR ERR eme 96 Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions 82 Automatic Dimming Mirror 96 Cargo Protector ees 85 Outside Mirrors eiie nen Eion 97 Power Convertible Top Controls 86 Power Remote Control Mirrors 98 Lowering The Power Convertible Top 87 Heated Remote Control Mirrors Raising The Power Convertible Top 87 ee v Wind Stop CERTE 88 Mara OO a lo rayis iaa oe Power Convertible Top Operation amp W
127. arning andy ree omnpacaHoR UConn es Messages Sod eoa cate Bini are cac Pete ac 92 If Equipped cese 6tere3eetiere se eeeee 99 Operations vut cies a cas dene RS d 101 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Phone Call Features UConnect System Features Advanced Phone Connectivity Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System General Information li Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Voice Recognition System VR Operation Commands Manual Front Seat Adjustments Easy Entry System 117 125 Power Seats If Equipped Head Restraints Heated Seats If Equipped ll To Open And Close The Hood B Lights Exterior amp Interior Lighting Control Headlights amp Parking Lights Automatic Headlights If Equipped Headlights With Wipers Available With Auto Headlights Only Headlight Time Delay If Equipped Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped Lights On Reminder ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 Fog Lights If Equipped 141 Wl Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 151 Turn Signals sucio Rb Oates ay eges 142 Electronic
128. at Belt Pretensioners How the Airbag System Works e Front Airbag Features The front airbag system has dual stage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appro priate to the level of crash severity as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC and the impact sensors at the front of the vehicle The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the second stage is expended later in the crash event ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 e Driver Airbag Special Features Driver airbag deployment and force level is controlled by the driver s seat position as well as impact severity Use of special inflators result in a very compact driver s airbag In addition to the small size the inflating gasses exit through strategically placed vents which direct the gas away from the occupant e Front Passenger Airbag Special Features A new active venting front passenger airbag is designed to reduce the risk of occupants who may be out of position by the use of active vents positioned on each side of the airbag e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this ve hicle The ORC determines if a frontal collision
129. at belts WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death WARNING Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the gear selection lever Accidents can also be caused by pressing the accelerator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries Automatic Transaxle The selector lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting the gear selector lever to any driving gear NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position and you must press the brake pedal before shifting the gear selector lever out of PARK 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start turn the ignition switch to the START position an
130. azard Warning Flasher 0 336 Head Restraints 0 6 0 135 Headlights 0 020000 138 139 401 Pwlub M Dc 139 Bulb Replacement 2050 401 Cleaning eg uso sr ebd dod een 391 Delay exse em mA SER eR Een 140 HighBeam esce here REY s 186 401 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 142 Lights On Reminder 000 141 On With Wipers 0 000 000 giras 139 148 PASSING 28 e i dee De hee obw primese 143 Replacing a so ana Reach aide RR e i 401 WHEN sace ed eec ba edi ie did 138 139 nn INDEX 441 Time Delay sas acs eee ere RO oe sD 140 Heated Mirrors llle 99 Heated Seats vi WE ERA Ge BEA enr A AO 135 Heater 42i hes eR xv e EPA 232 Heater Beverage Holder Cup Holder 164 Heater Engine Block 0 0 040 255 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 142 Hitches Trailer Towing 0 0000 324 Holder Cup ve HER pa teens AW 164 Holder Heated Cooled Cup Holder 164 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 155 Hood PfOp ot thane Be eere RES 138 Hood Release i4 ha Sa RR SERS OE 137 MOSES es de 4 Ea Cade eade RYE en x 381 Ipniton 2243 23 Rude Pe Reel Kerri e 4 12 Key cessum deuda uoa eo due eru 12 og JD 12 Ignition Key Removal less 12 Illaminated Entty ecc eren erm eg 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key airas reoni namanta ae 15 Indicator Traction Control 05 274 Infant Restraint
131. be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your authorized selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians 424 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance If your authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Cus tomer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 12
132. be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire if so equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flas
133. ble injury or damage CAUTION DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain REVERSE Use this range for moving the vehicle rearward Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Engine may be started in this range WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME DRIVE OVERDRIVE With 6 Speed Transaxle This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However use the AutoStick mode and select the 5 range when frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the DRIVE range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions ie in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions using the 5 range will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up DRIVE OVERDRIVE With 4 Speed Transaxle This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However select the 3 range when frequent transaxle shif
134. bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Pulling Out Latch Plate 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 When the belt is long enough to fit nc the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increas ing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as stron
135. bs at each end of the cargo protector in the V slots in the trunk liner Doing so closes a switch that allows top operation If the switch is not closed a warning message displays in the instrument cluster to notify the driver Positioning the Cargo Protector for Top Operation Pull the cargo protector toward you to begin unfolding the panels Grasp the handle in the center of the outer most top panel and raise the cargo protector Then align and seat the tabs at each end of the cargo protector in the V slots in the trunk liner as shown in the illustra tion Cargo Protector 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Convertible Top Controls There is also a Power Top button on the Remote Keyless The Power Top switch is located on the instrument panel Entry RKE Transmitter for remotely lowering the power to the left of the steering column convertible top 81afa60e Power Top Switch Power Top Button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Lowering the Power Convertible Top Using the Power Top Switch NOTE The Power Top switch will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and when in the power accessory delay There are two Top Down switch positions C2 Press the switch to the first detent and release it The system will lower all fully raised win dows approximately 0 5 inches 10 mm lower the top to its fully retracted position and then raise the windows
136. c Rear Window Defroster Operating Dips reas anre os deg hae der 243 It Equipped 5 dpa Sur hd dera nnn 246 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 81b5fe29 1 Air Outlet 6 Radio 11 Hazard Switch 2 Side Window Demister Outlet 7 Passenger Airbag 12 Storage Compartment 3 Instrument Cluster 8 Glove Box 13 Climate Control 4 Ignition Switch 9 Heated Seat Switch 14 Trunk Release Switch 5 Analog Clock 10 Electronic Stability Program Off Button 15 Power Top Switch If Equipped 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 8197bd24 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Pome oops CRIP A a 8197bd73 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ON position the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank 2 Fuel Door Reminder This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is EU located on the left side of the vehicle 3 Temperature Gauge E The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem eee perature Any reading below the red area of the gauge shows that the engine cooling system is operating properly The gauge pointer may show a higher than normal temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy stop and go traffic or whe
137. ceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that it will not shift during travel When traile ring cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transaxle steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transaxle in P for Park Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability t
138. cient clearance of at least 7 5 ft 2 2 m for the top to move up a To prevent striking a low ceiling or automatic door opener with the top it is strongly recommended that you do not operate the power top inside a garage or parking structure Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the convertible top components trunk contents and the vehicle interior CAUTION Do not operate the Power Top when the vehicle is in motion Do not operate the Power Top with the hydraulic pump valve open Do not allow the top to remain in the suspended position After approximately 10 minutes in the suspended position the hydraulic pressure will release which will allow the top and the trunk lid to lower Pressing the Power Top switch will cancel this operation Always use a normal ice scraper to remove snow or ice from the rear window Use of a sharp object or other tools could scratch the fabric or panels when removing snow or ice Always close the top when leaving your vehicle so as not to leave the interior exposed to potentially damaging outdoor conditions Do not leave the top lowered for several weeks at a time Close it occasionally to prevent discoloration in the folds of the fabric and to allow the creases to smooth out This is especially important if the top was stowed when not com pletely dry 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Before operating the Power Top make sure that no
139. cific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belts If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child re straints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the Child Restraint System for typical instal lation instructions Rear Seat LATCH Anchors Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles Rear Seat LATCH Anchors Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE
140. cle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 Loading Vehicle with a GVWR of 4480 To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty EXAMPLE ONLY Front Axle Rear Bale weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as Bep e i E TA KS evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before Load Includine dri EE 1 xg 7 driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you gad nchig ng dever e have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within passeng
141. clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel For tough stains apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 e For grease stains apply Mopar Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleanin
142. console and has three positions HEAT OFF COOL When the es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 unit is on and the LED is Red the cup holder is being Rear Seat Cup Holders heated When the LED is Blue the cup holder is being Cup holders for the rear seat occupants are located in the cooled armrests Each cup holder is capable of holding up to a 20 oz 1 liter bottle or can Heated or Cooled Cup Holder Rear Seat Cup Holder 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CONSOLE FEATURES Storage The center console contains a cubby bin with flip down cover located below the climate controls This compart ment also contains a 12 volt electrical outlet WARNING Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console A fire leading to bodily injury could result Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the armrest es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 The top compartment holds small items such as a pen and note pad while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike The bottom compartment also con tains a 12 volt power outlet and a molded in coin holder designed to hold various size coins The console s front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments NOTE e A notch in the side of the console base allows for use of a cell phone while it is plugged into the power outlet with the armrest latched down e The p
143. convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a Outside Mirrors vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Power Remote Control Mirrors After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door direction you want the mirror to move When finished trim A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or return the knob to the center O Off position to guard off position against accidentally moving a mirror position Power Mirror Adjust Switch Mirror Directions ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window Defrost Vanity Mirror If Equipped A vanity mirror is attached to the inside face of the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER radio contains an inte grate
144. ct the desired delay interval There are five delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles For vehicles equipped with the Speed Sensitive Intermit tent Wiper System the wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will double 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use Mist Feature Push downward on the Windshield Wiper Washer Control Lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever 818fc890 Mist Control Headlights with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn ON approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the Multi Function Control Lever on the left side of the steering column is placed in the A AUTO position In es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 addition the headlights will turn OFF when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by thi
145. ctions covering an area of about two square feet at a time Avoid heavy scrubbing Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome surfaces Allow the top to dry before lowering Vacuuming the top with a wet dry shop vacuum will decrease the top s drying time ensure removal of all dirt and delete streaks in the material Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stubborn stains If stains persist contact your local dealership for further sugges tions Additional Cleaning Procedure For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn stains apply Mopar Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner 4883061 to the complete stain extending 2 inches 50 mm beyond the stain With a soft bristle brush scrub in all directions over the stain Avoid heavy scrubbing Rinse the area with warm water If the stain is still apparent repeat the cleaning procedure When the stain is no longer showing rinse the complete top with warm water Let the top dry before lowering it Protection For appearance purposes you may wish to protect your Twillfast cloth top periodically A fabric protectant such as Scotchguard is suggested The top should be clean and dry before application of the protectant ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 CAUTION Avoid getting Scotchguard on the surrounding weather strips moldings paint or glass Damage to these items might occur
146. cur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Anti Lock Brake System If Equipped The Anti Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e A clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated elec tronic equipment that may be susceptible to interferenc
147. curity It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 e Press the Learn Button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device
148. d regular 800dfab gasolines having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality unleaded regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 3 5L Engine The 3 5L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac 87 tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav 800diab ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of pre mium gasoline is not recommended Un der normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality unleaded regular and mid grade gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance REGOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD REGOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD 89 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the ap propriate octane rating for your engine before consider ing service for th
149. d Hands Free Communication UConnect sys tem Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for this radio UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile ver sion 0 96 or higher See UConnect website for supported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect or call 1 877 855 8400 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names with four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that
150. d from the rear seat belts while driving with the top down safely bring the vehicle to a stop and buckle the rear seat belts over the empty seats This will keep tension on the seat belts and remove the fluttering condition ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 CAUTION e Correctly position the cargo protector in the trunk before stowing the top Doing so closes a switch that allows top operation stowing to proceed If the switch is not closed a warning message dis plays in the instrument cluster to notify the driver Always place items carefully into the trunk Do not push items too far into the trunk particu larly when the top is retracted into its stowage area in the trunk Do not use the area near the tonneau cover for storage Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the convertible top components trunk contents and the vehicle interior CAUTION Before operating the Power Top 1 Always check the tonneau cover area to be sure that it is clear of debris or other items 2 Make sure the ambient temperature is above 0 F 18 C a Never attempt to lower a frozen convertible top Wait until the top is thawed before lowering it into the stowage compartment b Make sure the convertible top is dry before lowering it into the stowage compartment Lowering the top when damp wet or dirty can cause stains mildew and damage to the inside of your vehicle 3 Make sure there is suffi
151. d release it when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure For vehicles equipped with Tip Start turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Extremely Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 253 If Engine Fails to Start Without Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire engine is flooded causing serious personal injury CAUTION To prevent damage to the
152. d routes A shared Hard Drive HDD for the navigation system the database and other radio features allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port While the Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the car speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless headphones This means 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other special features include direct tune music type selections Traffic Messaging optional easy store pre sets parental lockout for VES if equipped backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera and on some models a dual display screen operation Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Clock Setting Procedure The GPS recei
153. dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following proce dure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 15 Cruise Indicator If Equipped CRUISE This indicator shows that the Speed Control System is ON 16 Odometer Trip Odometer Reset Knob Single Trip Odometer Press and release this button to change the display from odometer to trip odometer The word Trip displays to show that the odometer is in Trip Mode Press and release the button again to change the display back to the odometer To reset the trip odometer first set the display to Trip Mode Then push and hold the button approximately 2 seconds until the display resets to 0 The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Dual Trip Odometer If Equipped Press
154. der maxi the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your mum load is dangerous The added strain on your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 292 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Prolonged use of limited use spare or an incorrect tire size on either front wheel may damage transaxle differential and result in loss of vehicle mobility Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact
155. der to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed Refer to Automatic Locking Mode in this section for details A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled Position the shoul der and lap belt on the child restraint The Automatic Locking Retractor ALR is activated by first attaching the child seat then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor then allowing the webbing to retract As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode To release simply unbuckle the seat belt by depressing the button and allow the webbing to retract into the retractor In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 If lowered raise t
156. dio Buttons es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 Play Mode tace race Bake aos dens 222 List Or Browse Mode 0 0 223 H Satellite Radio RSC If Equipped RER REQ REN Radios Only 225 System Activation ca haer em ean 225 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 226 Selecting Satellite Mode 226 Satellite Antenna lees 226 Reception Quality 040 227 Operating Instructions Satellite Mode 227 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone lf Equipped isses ce n nn 229 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped 229 ll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped 230 Right Hand Switch Functions 230 Left Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operation Left Hand Switch Functions For Media e CD Operation we eae ces aie gia eae 231 lll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 231 ll CD DVD Disc Maintenance 231 Bl Climate Controls 0 000 000 0 eee 232 Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Automatic Temperature Control ATC Bl Rear Window Features 00005 246 If Equipped x esee sa dane a Eme 237 Electri
157. door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety stan dards This includes most garage door opener models Programming HomeLink manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLin
158. duesdca deeem EA ane hen 260 Selection of Lubricant sls 412 Transmission Range Indicator i222 eR e 178 Transmission 00 ee eee See Transaxle Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 00 26 452 INDEX ME Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink ore 4 ku eR n 155 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 21 Transporting Pets ran banna Pra e aa 72 Tread Wear Indicators 00 05 294 Trip Odometer se i ear piai gE pari eee 178 Trip Odometer Reset Button 180 Trunk Lid Deck Lid 0 0 36 38 Trunk Release Emergency lle 38 Trunk Release Remote Control 36 Turn Signals ce 2er m 138 142 183 404 UCT Connector tsi sow EXER ERR X E 221 UConnect Hands Free Phone 99 217 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 173 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 429 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 221 Universal Serial Bus USB Port 213 217 Universal Transmitter 00 155 Unleaded Gasoline llle 307 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 44 Upholstery Care 1 eee ee 389 USB Pott ux aper QE ee eas 213 217 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 004 381 Vanity Mirrors uu acce tig aceUEg sedo xs 99 Variance Compass llle 192 Vehicle Certification Label
159. e 8 km h o gt Timeo CONVERT Until Op TOP Until Opera The System is IBLE TOP IN eration is tion is Com Lowering or OPERATION Complete plete Raising the Top CONVERT 9 Seconds TOP DONE Display Scrolls Single The System IBLE TOP for 6 Seconds Chime Completes Op COMPLETE eration of Low ering or Raising the Top SECURE 9 Seconds SET CARGO Display Scrolls Single The Top Fails to Position the CARGO SHIELD for 9 Seconds Chime Move When Op Cargo Protec SHIELD erating the tor in the Power Top Con Trunk to Allow trol Top Operation CONVERT Until Op TOP Until Opera TOP Until Op Single The System Fails Cycle Power IBLE TOP IN eration is tion is Com eration is Chime to Complete Op Top Control OPERATION Complete plete Complete eration of Low ering or Raising the Top 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M EVIC EVIC Odometer Odometer Odometer Odometer Chime Condition Operator Message Message Message Message Message Message Action Display 5 mph Display 5 mph Display Required Time 8 km h o 9 Time gt 8 km h gt Time SPEED TOO 9 Seconds SPEED TOO Display Scrolls TOP 6 Seconds Single You Are Operat The Top Will HIGH HIGH for 9 Seconds Chime ing the Power Not Operate Top at a Vehicle Unless the Ve Speed Greater hicle is Station Than 0 mph 0 Jary km h TRUNK Continu
160. e 81546c40 e The tongue weight of the trailer Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch e The weight of the driver and all passengers en STARTING AND OPERATING 327 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard under Tire Safety Information in Section 5 of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occu pants and cargo for your vehicle CAUTION Incorrect tongue weight could result in increased yaw or vehicle instability A negative tongue weight could unload the rear suspension of the tow vehicle decreasing vehicle stability Negative tongue weight could cause the trailer to squat and potentially be come disengaged from the tow vehicle resulting in a runaway trailer condition Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the schedule maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never ex
161. e caused by improperly installed or high output radio trans mitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equip ment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effec tiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others STARTING AND OPERATING 269 All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Anti Lock Brake Light The ABS light monitors the Anti Lock Brake fes System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the
162. e setting is to a particular sym gi99ca21 DOL the more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor uf Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side x window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost W Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed This de humidifi
163. e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries e To call one of the names in the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you wi
164. e Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the indicator light will turn again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro cedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm VSA system monitors the doors and trunk for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the system will sound the horn intermittently flash the headlights the park lights and the taillights and flash th
165. e Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light in the cluster Rearming of the System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the system will rearm itself en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Arm the System 1 Remove the keys from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle 2 Lock the doors by pressing the power door lock switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter NOTE The system will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers 3 Close all doors The VSA Indicator Light in the instru ment cluster will flash rapidly for 16 seconds This shows that the system is arming After 16 seconds the indicator light will flash slowly This shows that the system is fully armed NOTE e During the 16 second arming period if a door is opened or the ignition switch is turned ON the system will automatically disarm e Once armed the system disables the unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and passenger door trim panel the trunk release button on the instrument panel and the HomeLink Garage Door Opener if equipped To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid sentry key into the ignition switch lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON or START position NOTE
166. e acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 432 INDEX BEEN About Your Brakes llle 264 267 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 268 Accessory Delay Power isses 12 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 377 Adding Fuel 0024 cea asa e e 316 Adding Washer Fluid 0 149 374 Additives Fuel 2 0 0 0 0 00 cee ee nee 310 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 365 Air Conditioner Maintenance
167. e cod ceca ie t iniret eager bh 264 Warning Light 0 0 00 0 182 Brakes suae ee A eo Be dos 267 381 Brake Transaxle Interlock lesse 256 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 72 Brightness Interior Lights 144 Bulb Replacement 0 054 400 401 Bulbs light osse RR as 76 400 Calibration Compass 0000000000 192 Capacities Fluid ice ke nb RR eo RS 409 Caps Filler Edel o rea R ine dn ERRAT dens EUER S 316 Oil Engine sa soni ir EIER 354 355 356 363 Radiator Coolant Pressure 378 Car Washes 2 23 ed PASEO oS eee in 388 Carbon Monoxide Warning 74 311 Cargo Vehicle Loading 319 Catalytic Converter sse Re 366 CD Compact Disc Player 213217 CD Compact Disc Player Maintenance 231 Cellular Phone siressa terasi rniu 99 217 218 231 Center High Mounted Stop Light 408 Certification Label ceire sped ninisr pt ennes 319 Chains Tire 2c va x fale pho ESTE 297 Changing A Flat Tire 00005 338 Chart Tire Sizing 5 ese RR anes 281 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 358 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 73 Checks Safety cx ng Eee e RES HER 73 Child Restraint s 62 63 64 68 69 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 66 68 Cigar Lighter 2 4 2e PRSE eR FPL Ss 163 Clean Air Gasoline sss xe Re 309 en INDEX
168. e hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser voir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct fluid type 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the WARNING e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling point than th
169. e iPod device e 1 Playlists e 2 Artists e 3 Albums e 4 Genres e 5 Audiobooks e 6 Podcasts After pressing a preset button you will see the list you are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit the List mode without selecting a track press the same preset button again to go back to Play mode LIST Button Pressing the LIST button will take to the top level menu of the iPod This takes you to the same top level menu as on your iPod Turn the TUNE SCROLL knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and then press the TUNE SCROLL knob This will take you to the next sub menu list item of the iPod and you es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE Button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod SATELLITE RADIO RSC IF EQUIPPED RER REQ REN RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers up to 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is
170. e is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials and cell phones should be kept away from the top of the Instrument Panel This is where the compass sensor is located UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Leave the selector lever in PARK 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 3 Press and release the STEP button until Compass Variance and the current Variance Value displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the RESET button to increment the Variance Value by one one button press per update until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map NOTE The Variance Values will wrap around from 15 back to 1 The Default Variance is Zone 8 5 Press and release the STEP button to exit Press the STEP button if you wish to calibrate the compass manu ally Refer to Manual Compass Calibration COMPASS VARIANCE MAP e00ccbab 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK Press and relea
171. e loss through the tire e The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than 3 hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient tempera ture is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 157 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tir
172. e recommended MOPAR DOT 3 product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture brake fluid all brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure Automatic Transaxle The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are contained within a single housing The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transaxle and the fluid Fluid Level Check Vehicles with 3 5L Engine The automatic transaxle has no dipstick and is dealer serviced only ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 Fluid Level Check Vehicles with 2 4L and 2 7L Engines Use the following procedure to check the automatic transaxle fluid level properly 1 Park the vehicle on level ground 2 Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Apply the parking brake fully 4 Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in PARK 5 Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transaxle 6 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or cold Hot fluid is approximately
173. e rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se seconds will allow the program format type to be se Program Type 16 Digit Character Display lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Nostalei
174. e vehicle Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica tions the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions engine performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recommends the use of gaso lines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION For vehicles equipped with a 2 4L or 3 5L engine DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Etha nol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components NOTE The 2 7L engine is
175. e you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the radio and steering wheel radio controls if equipped will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Informati
176. ear on the screen mm 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Setting the User Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the system clock you can manually adjust the time by performing the following 1 Turn on the system 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen If the words Time User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen proceed to Step 4 Otherwise proceed to Step 3 3 If the words Time GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen touch the bottom of the screen where the words GPS Time are displayed The user clock time setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed
177. ed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se BeltAlert Programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps NOTE DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deacti vating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt partially after unbuckling it 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reac tivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will con
178. ed the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever up and release RESUME ACCEL and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal To Vary The Speed Setting When the speed control is set you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the lever RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h etc To decrease speed while the speed control is set push down and hold the lever SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M bestie Seanad Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the VADS pedal
179. eep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly Refer to information on Child Restraint in this section should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older chil dren who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to information on Child Restraint in this section ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airb
180. egins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions es STARTING AND OPERATING 277 WARNING e The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road condi tions The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP Operating Modes The ESP system has two available operating modes ESP On This is the normal operating mode for ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for almost all driving situa tions ESP should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off Mode The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the threshold for ESP activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESP normally allows 278 STARTIN
181. el speeds may cause axle and front wheels Then shift back and forth between Reverse tire damage or failure A tire could explode and and First gear Usually the least accelerator pedal pres injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels sure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 Wheels is most effective seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning NOTE wheel no matter what the speed If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con trol turn the system OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle Refer to Partial Off Mode under Electronic Stability Program ESP in Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast Section 5 of this manual may lead to transaxle overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h Do not spin the wheels continu ously for more than 30 seconds ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE WITHOUT THE IGNITION KEY Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position Flat bed towing is the preferred towing method However if a flat bed towing vehicle is not available a wheel lift towing vehicle may be used Furthermore rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels on the ground as transaxle damage can result If rear towing is the only alternative a f
182. ells you that you are unable to go into recirculation mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode Knob to Panel Panel Floor and then press the Recirculation Button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defros
183. elt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints In addition the front passenger seat belt includes a two stage load limiting feature to enhance occupant pro tection for the same reason NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC refer to information on Airbags in this section Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occu pants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reac tivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle spe
184. elt on 2 7L engines 120 000 200 000 120 P artial Z ero E missions V ehicle WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For In Mexico Contact 0 6 20 0 0 eee eee 424 Your Vehicle sse e5 44300556003 G45 ERR 423 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Prepare For The Appointment 423 Speech Impaired TDD TTY 425 Pr pare A EISES io dcs ee aati a RA 423 Service Contract 0 20000 000 425 Be Reasonable With Requests 423 i Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 426 H If You Need Assistance 00 423 Gi Mopar Parts voro RIRs 426 DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Bl Reporting Safety Defects 22x rnm 427 Customer Centr gt c crac errieri ceras srgu 424 In The 50 United States And m DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Washington D C isse RR Re 427 Customer Center i cs ba ect RR RR s 424 In Canada us cb ve eee ee YEN ES 427 422 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Bl Publication Order Forms 4 42
185. emains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunc tion is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function However there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle In addition if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the hydraulic system the brake warning indicator will turn on as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder In the event power assist is lost for any reason i e repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function However the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating WARNING e Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot rest ing or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dan gerous A significant decrease in braking perfor mance or vehicle stability during braking may oc
186. emove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Always refer to the wiper blade packaging for specific installation instructions Many wiper blade re placements fit multiple vehicles 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Windshield Washers NOTE Refer to the appropriate Engine Compartment diagram in Section 7 for the location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into t
187. enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone uy amp for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons Phone button and Voice Recognition button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio a The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system T
188. engers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The Gross Trailer Weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW Tongue Weight TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than or more than 10 of the trailer load You must conside
189. er from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth Installation Align the liner in the cup holder and press down firmly ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 CONVERTIBLE TOP CARE Soft Top Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and appearance and make successive cleanings easier Do not subject the top to excessive heat Frequently vacuum the top and storage compartment Washing Hand washing is highly recommended Automatic car washing equipment can damage the top material If you must use an automatic car wash soft cloth systems are preferred CAUTION Avoid high pressure car washes as they can damage the top material Also increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips General Cleaning Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top The top should be washed with a soft natural bristle scrub brush and a mild soap solution such as liquid dishwashing soap Do not use detergent CAUTION Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches Cleaners should not contain silicones organic sol vents petroleum distillates or plasticizers Always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering it into the storage area 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Scrub in all dire
190. er inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale light 302 STARTING AND OPERATING e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will d illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pres sures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to
191. er preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle OFF or ON Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the sett
192. erious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two 8tae46a9 E 85 Badge 314 STARTING AND OPERATING ME For best results a refueling pattern that alternates be tween E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided When you do switch fuels it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full e you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling e you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in drivability during warm up NOTE When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in Mopar engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting DaimlerChrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufac turer only recommends engine oil
193. ers and cargo 123 kg 263 kg Total 2124 Ibs 2210 Ibs the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect 708 Kg ee on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way GAWR Te a mE T m the brakes operate 8 1036 kg NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label at tached to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWR This table is only an example A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration Note that neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been exceeded 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing this section please consult your dealer for full details on the towing capabilities of the vehicle Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver pass
194. es are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value en STARTING AND OPERATING 301 NOTE SADTIONS e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if und
195. es the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Recirculation Control Press in on this button to block the flow of outside air from coming into the passen ger compartment A light will illuminate when the system is in recirculation mode Only use the recirculation mode as a temporary means to block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the inte rior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather 8199cd1d 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled Air Conditioning Control Press in on this button to en gage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged Rotating the dial le
196. ete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 272 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches millimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following before doing so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine
197. ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level 4 Cylinder Engines the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle 6 Cylinder Engines the level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the COLD and FULL range on the bottle when the engine is cold The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermos
198. f rear towing is the only alternative a front end dolly must be used Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E 2 4L Engine Compartment 354 H 2 7L Engine Compartment 355 B 3 5L Engine Compartment 356 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 357 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 358 Bl Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs xam EPH rale d x aem eae 358 B Replacement Parts xar x ern me 360 W Dealer Service llle 360 Bl Maintenance Procedures 361 Engine Oll ere Haig arre der et ie 361 Engine Oil Filter ees sse e aen 365 Drive Belt soccer Spark Plugs 4 2 ce enc ht y eee Engine Air Cleaner Filter Catalytic Converter 202000 cere Maintenance Free Battery 367 Air Conditioner Maintenance 369 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se A C Air Filter If Equipped 370 Power Steering Fluid Check 371 Front Suspension Ball Joints 372 Steering Linkage sestese pinaka taai es 372 Body Lubrication csssserrsssesssr 372 Windshield Wiper Blades 373 Windshield Washers 0 374 Exhaust System 64 4 soda bi panes ag
199. fety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service 258 STARTING AND OPERATING EE 4 Speed or 6 Speed AutoStick9 Automatic Transaxle The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise shift schedule The transaxle electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles Selector Lever Gear Ranges P PARK P PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the transaxle The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use P PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the selector lever in the P PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the selector lever in P PARK otherwise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of P PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 WARNING Never use PARK position on an Automatic Transaxle as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possi
200. flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Flash Lights with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the transmit
201. for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading
202. frigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for A C Air Filter service intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C Air Filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result The A C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following procedure to re place the filter 1 Open the glove box and remove all contents 2 Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the door 3 Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot on the side of the box This is done by grasping the dampener connector on the outside of the box and the end of the connector pin on the inside of the box with your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand Once disconnected the dampener will retract under neath the instrument panel if you release it 4 Pivot the glove box downward ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 5 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the
203. ft into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures 8199cd1e NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX AIC For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped 819bfad4 Automatic Temperature Control Automatic Operation The Infrared Climate Control System automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger To accomplish this the system gathers information from the cabin infrared sensor mounted between the sun visors and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle The controls on the climate control provide the system with operator input Other sensors take account of ve hicle speed A C pressure outside temperature and engine cooling temperature Using all of these inputs the system automatically adjusts airflow temperature air flow distribution airflow volume and the amount of outside air recirculation This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions
204. further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the instrument clus ter Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight ened Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a fuel evaporation system error If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Light is functioning and
205. g as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your WARNINGE f abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up WARNING on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight lift up on the shoulder belt and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Positioning Lap Belt 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR
206. g slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in or
207. g the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders Removal Grab the rubber portion of the cup holder and lift upward Cleaning Soak the rubber cup holder liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately one hour After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess wat
208. ge eyre rest nE RS ene ae eed 178 Taillights mme xc er cre EY e 404 Telescoping Steering Column 150 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 237 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 176 337 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 66 Tilt Steering Column 00005 150 Time Delay Headlight 004 140 Tire and Loading Information Placard 284 Tire Identification Number TIN 283 Tire Markings 2 ccs cee e e ae es 280 Tire Safety Information 06 280 Tires ees Rees do rtr PRI hale Eri 75 288 429 Aging Life of Tires 0 00 295 AGP Pressure o ew he tad eta RR rack Ed 288 Alignment csere dore pp eds a singat api a 297 Chains 23999 oe kareri Sate e 297 Changing exte eo adh ah seen bea stag 338 Compact Spare isses cu ae lined Ch aes 292 blat Changing RR 338 344 General Information 000005 288 ELST Speed iiu deri kigae Soe 291 Inflation Pressures llle 289 PACKING sooo stopped de e ae iNe eae da eS 338 Lif of Tires dure EG e NUR E OE WA 295 Load Capacify i ke es 284 285 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 299 Quality Grading 000000 429 Radial icc hs oe ah ene oS hae oe BAERS A 291 Replacement iussis pes euer Usa o ped 296 R tatiOn 4 hes RR dee RR Y A 298 Safety eirese dda 99 RD deed RET Oe ES 280 288 SIZES iiss aues iex Se WE RA UA RE RR i 281 Sn
209. gnition key cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States Canada KR55120123 2671 S120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 4L and 2 7L Engines 2 4L and 2 7L engines are designed to meet all emission regulations and provide excel 87 lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleade
210. h on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 304 STARTING AND OPERATING Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e 3 Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitor
211. han 30 mph 48 km h and the ESP is synchronized refer to Synchronizing ESP see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected 23 Anti Lock Warning Light ABS This light monitors the ABS This light will fes come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required however 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti Lock Brakes The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to assure that it is operating properly Turn the ignition key to the on position but do not start the vehicle The light should come on If the light does not come on have the system checked by an authorized dealer 24 Tire Pressure Monitor Light Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
212. he CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system OFF push and 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M release the ONOFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off Be sure to turn the system OFF when not in use NOTE The Electronic Speed Control System will auto matically turn off when the engine is turned off WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press down on the lever and release SET DECEL Release the accel erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph 40 km h for the speed control to set e The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the lever SET DECEL To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the Speed Control Lever toward you CANCEL or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory Pressing the ONOFF button or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 To Resume Speed If you deactivat
213. he second track three times to listen to the third track and so forth e Press the button located in the center of the switch to change to the next preset that you have programmed RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high 8 Do not play discs that are small in size or have irregular shapes 81a10d01 CLIMATE CONTROLS The Manua
214. he convertible top NOTE Theconvertible top must be in the up position to access the tether anchor 2 Open the access port cover A behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 4 Open the access cover C on the carpet covering the back of the seat and attach the tether strap hook D to the Child Tether Access Port Cover 3 Push the tether strap and hook B through the access port and down into the trunk Child Tether Anchor 5 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path from the child seat to the anchor 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 3
215. he jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For ex ample if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel BLOCKA Jack Location The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor in the trunk Spare Tire Stowage The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the trunk WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 Spare Tire Removal Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down Spare Tire and Jack Stowage 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jacking Instructions 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly NOTE The Jack Handle attaches to the side of the jack with two attachment points When the jack is partially expanded the tension between the two attachment points holds the jack handle in place 819b068d Removing Jack Handle From Jack 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 81bbf910 Jacking Locations 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTI
216. he rear of the seat cushion where it 4 In addition there are tether strap anchorages a b behind each rear seating position Access ports to the tether anchors are located in the panel between the rear seat and the rear window The tether anchors are underneath access covers in the carpet covering the back of the seat where you see this symbol Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor age being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removin
217. he result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EEEEEEEEEEEREREAMAMMEMECCCC CAUTION Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such re
218. he seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 85EATCHECK en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 WARNING Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Improper installation can lead to failure of an e Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder infant or child restraint It could come loose in a belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to collision The child could be badly injured or bend over the front of the seat when their back is killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt actly when installing an infant or child restraint in a rear seat A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy Standards We also recommend that you make sure ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle fatal injury to the infant where you will
219. he vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil change or lubrication Replace as required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 WARNING Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot 376 MAINTA
220. he volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree
221. heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Heated Seat Switches Press the switch once to select high level heating Press the switch a second time to select low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut off the heating elements es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Next move to the outside of the vehicle and lift the Two latches must be released to open the hood First pull secondary latch underneath the center front edge of the the hood release lever located under the left side of the hood Then raise the hood instrument panel 4 DUNT Hood Safety Catch Hood Release Lever 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at position Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage on the underside of the hood WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Exterior amp Interior Lighting Control x The Multi Function Control Lever on the left side x of the steering column controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signal lights Hood Prop Rod Hole Location Before c
222. hedule in this manual In addition change the fluid and filter if the transaxle is disassembled for any reason Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transaxle The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Front and Rear Wheel Bearings Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed No regular maintenance is required for these compo nents Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is t
223. hese conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible CAUTION Always remove Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil SpeedPass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components the same keychain will not cause a key related transpon der fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a fou
224. his feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on LOCK UNLOCK feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with LOCK When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn On LOCK feature selected To make your selection press and re lease the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Headlights Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Headlights With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window
225. hts 0 139 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 179 189 414 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 237 Automatic Transaxle 251 255 384 Adding Fluid 00040 384 385 412 Filter m 386 Fluid and Filter Changes 386 Fluid Level Check sss 384 385 Interlock System llle 256 257 Reset Mode llle 261 Selection Of Lubricant 0005 412 SHINE xv is vedas xtd eade as ea te 255 Special Additives exei edes eee s 386 Autostick usce dao e o Da eg d TUR UR 262 Back Up Lights i52 M RR ERE 404 Ball Joints 4 Re ah me 372 Battery Emergency Starting suc se be be e Gas Caution iu ssa goed es Re x exe Jump Starting 2 6 eee Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE FOCAHON 55 y s aperte Yu eee epa s Bearings Belts Drive 24d iau Bee AXG xs 63e n Belts Seat ii zia ede gare n PEE Xa Or Beverage Holder Cooled Cup Holder Beverage Holder Heated Cup Holder Body Mechanism Lubrication B Pillar Location Brake Assist System 1 2 2 0 000000 cee Brake Control System Electronic brake PIG septic web ee adi Scene d Brake Parking sc Ra bois Cad Phas 4 Brake SYStOM Lass shee ae kes MER RO Roe Anti Lock ABS 434 INDEX ME Fluid Check ssa canem 383 412 Hoses uuu daw 3 ded eR SUE E 382 Master Cylinder sorsia s ks a kita hanns xe 383 Parking s
226. ical Disturbances 197 AM Reception ocer 6 0 0c eee 197 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M FM Reception iiu sacer RR RR RC en 197 Bl Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack 000000085 198 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 199 Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 206 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 208 List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play ssssssss 211 Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 00 211 ll Sales Code REN Multimedia System It Equipped 22s e et Eee 213 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio T Equipped 3 22 22 hace Us santos s 214 Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure ll Sales Code RER Multimedia System If Equipped Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure lll Universal Consumer Interface UCI If Equipped Connecting The iPod Device Controlling The iPod Using Ra
227. ice The engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e For security power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 To Exit Remote Start Mode amp Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then within 15 minutes insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start Mode Press and release the remote start button one time NOTE To avoid inadvertent shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the remote start button for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door lock plunger on each door tri
228. ich may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean then 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Mopar Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a
229. icles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 20 Turn Signal Indicators The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turn signal when using the turn signal lever 21 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light shows when the front fog lights are ON 22 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light The yellow ESP BAS malfunction indicator ESP light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and you have driven the vehicle several miles at speeds greater t
230. ies in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook EN e Press the PHONE button to begin
231. ieve that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Wash ington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 428 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your
232. ified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion Apply grease to posts and clamps after tightening If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage as battery damage can result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 Air Conditioner Maintenance 7 WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Re
233. ill display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push th
234. in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transaxle overheating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods put the transaxle in neutral and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily Refer to Cooling System under Maintenance Pro cedures in Section 7 of this manual for more informa tion If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing this section please consult your dealer to for full details on the towing capabilities of the vehicle RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended NOTE Ifthe vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 336 H If Your Engine Overheats 336 Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Engine Only lf Equipped seem 337 H Jacking And Tire Changing 338 Preparations For Jacking 338 Jack Location ciam eaea 2 49 Re e 339 Spare Tire Stowage angaa eee 339 Jacking Instructions 000 340
235. ing Low Pressure Warnings X The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will d illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing 81826bed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for 3 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81826bd7 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault
236. ing is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set
237. ing played and then choose the phone you wish to delete ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the voice recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rear view mirror to provide at least 0 5 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always
238. ing tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low en STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi WARNING tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera poorly The instability could cause an accident Al tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading Of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine and cold tire inflation pressures them with other types of tires WARNING Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in High speed driving with your vehicle un
239. ints There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are permanently lubricated Inspect these ball joints when other maintenance is performed A damaged seal and the corresponding potentially damaged ball joint must be replaced Steering Linkage The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for external leakage and damage when other maintenance is performed Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including seat tracks door hinges trunk hinges and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will r
240. ion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems Tire Pressure You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of areas are affected by improper tire pressure vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure en STARTING AND OPERATING 289 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information fo
241. ioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Enhanced Accident Response System Maintaining Your Airbag System In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment with the vehicle stopped and the vehicle communication network intact and the power intact the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following func Modifications to any part of the airbag system tions could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or e Flashes hazard lights wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e Cuts off fuel to the engine e Turns on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlocks the doors automatically It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOU
242. is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M s
243. is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Speed Control can be dangerous where the system Using Speed Control On Hills can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x WARNING WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the
244. ition and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Convertible Top Operation Refer to Convertible Top Operation under Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle in Section 2 of this manual To Unlatch the Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the transmitter two times to unlatch the trunk Express Down Window Feature This feature allows you to remotely lower both door and rear quarter windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the illuminated entry system if equipped will turn on The panic alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5
245. ives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost Sv Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK e Air Conditioner Control ro Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial Press this button a second time to turn off the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recir CO culation However pressing the Recircula tion Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode ten minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present
246. k button and the hand held transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open amp close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming sec tion e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
247. k Plugs 3 5L ZFR5LP 13G Gap 050 in 1 27 mm Fuel Selection 2 4L amp 2 7L 87 Octane Fuel Selection 2 7L EXCEPT CALI E 85 Ethanol FORNIA EMISSION STATES S Fuel Selection 3 5L 87 to 89 Octane 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transaxle Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Brake Master Cylinder Power Steering Reservoir Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emission Control System Maintenance 414 Required Maintenance Intervals Mi Maintenance Schedule 0 414 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N m E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and ver
248. km h 3 The transaxle is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Auto Unlock on Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Auto Unlock on Exit feature in accor dance with local laws WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door trim panel operate the door windows and the rear quarter windows Auto Power Window Switches ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 There isa single window control on the passenger s door WARNING trim panel which operates the passenger door window
249. l Light Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 RKE Remote Keyless Entry Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park Left Right Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Headlights On Key In Ignition Convertible Top In Operation with a single chime Convertible Top Complete with a single chime Secure Cargo Shield with a single chime Speed Too High with a single chime e Convertible Top Malfunction with a single chime e Oil Change Required with a single chime Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and re
250. l Temperature Controls consist of a series of The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to outer rotary dials and inner push knobs make you comfortable in all types of weather ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Blower Control 8199cd22 Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation sys tem in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O Off position There are four blower speeds Temperature Control 8199cd20 NOTE Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air in side the passenger compart ment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution You can select ei ther a primary mode as iden tified by the symbols on the control or a blend of two of these modes The closer th
251. l can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake And Power Steering Hoses When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and excessive swell ing suggest deterioration of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Often fluids such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings Therefore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before a hose is replaced based on leakage Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change Inspect hy draulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If there is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots the hose should be replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of th
252. l not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dial ing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once
253. laced as soon as possible WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated immediately flat tire repaired or replaced 11 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct pressure as required JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345 WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contami nated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable
254. le and add fluid as needed Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle NOTE Six speed AutoStick Transaxle if equipped is sealed therefore checking the fluid level can only be done by a certified dealership service center e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 417 Required Maintenance Intervals Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 6 000 10 000 6 Rotate the tires 6 000 10 000 6 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if nec 12 000 20 000 12 essary Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary 12 000 20 000 12 Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped 12 000 20 000 12 Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months an ipod a Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspec tion at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months ane isan a Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot 24 000 40 000 24 seals and replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter 30 000 50
255. le Warning Messages When the appropriate conditions exist DOOR AJAR TRUNK AJAR or gASCAP will display in the odom eter NOTE If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC then all warnings including DOOR AJAR and TRUNK AJAR will only display in the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in this section for specific messages gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change in the evaporative system or the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the words gASCAP will display in the odometer If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the gASCAP message Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Section 7 of this manual for more information If the problem con tinues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started See your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible Change Oil Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
256. lease the Menu button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press and release the STEP button to advance the display through the Trip Functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will con tinue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel
257. ll hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Dial es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press a
258. ll turn the ESP BAS Malfunction Indica tor Light on continuously while the engine running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and you have driven the vehicle several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h and the ESP is synchro nized refer to Synchronizing ESP see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light will turn on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation Synchronizing ESP If the power supply is interrupted battery disconnected or discharged the ESP BAS malfunction indicator light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESP BAS malfunction indicator light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible 280 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD
259. llowing commands REPEAT to repeat a memo NEXT to play the next memo PREVIOUS to play the previous memo DELETE to delete a memo e DELETE ALL to delete all memos NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the VR hard key first and wait for the beep before speaking the barge in commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the VR hard key speak System Setup and once you are in that menu then speak Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect System For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SEATS Manual Front Seat Adjustments Forward amp Rearward Adjustment If Equipped The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched Ma
260. losing the hood make sure to stow the prop rod instrument panel lights instrument panel light dimming in its proper location To prevent possible damage do not interior lights and fog lights if equipped es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Headlights amp Parking Lights Turn the end of the Multi Function Control Lever to the first detent for parking light operation Turn the end of the lever to the second detent for headlight operation Headlight Switch Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights ON or OFF according to ambient light levels To turn the system ON turn the end of the Multi Function Control Lever to the A AUTO position third detent When the system is ON the Headlight Time Delay feature is also ON This means the headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position To turn the Automatic System OFF turn the end of the Multi Function Control Lever out of the A position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn ON in the Automatic mode Headlights with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn ON approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the Multi Function Control Lever is placed in the A 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn OFF
261. lty in cold starting and may affect drivability 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap As a reminder a fuel icon with an arrow lt indicating which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located on is located in the instrument cluster just below the Fuel Gage The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left rear of the vehicle Push in on the right side of the fuel filler door near the edge and release and the door will open Then grasp the door and open it Fuel Filler Door en STARTING AND OPERATING 317 om eode of the Gl dope Thr les the ge cp on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the gas cap CAUTION hicle s surface e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Fuel Filler Door Features NOTE If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add f
262. lugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the specified mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the proper type of spark plug for use in your vehicle Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for engine air cleaner filter maintenance inter vals NOTE Be sure to follow the dusty or off road condi tions maintenance interval if applicable 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con i verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of
263. m panel upward If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Power Door Locks WARNING A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger door trim panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Lock Switch ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Automatic Door Locks The Auto Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer See your dealer for program ming Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Auto Unlock on Exit feature is enabled 2 The transaxle was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0
264. me knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired Automatic User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort to any air delivery point outside or recirculated AIC on or off Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Sct mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort User selectable to any speed User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic User selectable outside or User selectable A C on or off 81a12736 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear o Bi Level Js Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature g
265. men That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and stow it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating DR
266. mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad ditives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Drive Belt At the mileage indicated in section 8 Maintenance Schedule replace the drive belt with a new drive belt NOTE The belt must be routed correctly to ensure proper drive function Spark P
267. n CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio to the Radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Supported Medium Formats File Systems Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 When reading discs recorded using formats other than WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read disc open after writing are most likely multisession file
268. n the doors are open 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent past the gx The Windshield Wiper Washer Control Lever is intermittent settings for Low speed wiper operation or W located on the right side of the steering column to the second detent past the intermittent settings for High speed wiper operation NOTE The wipers will automatically return to the Park position if you turn off the ignition switch while they are operating The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again 81a14d89 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than OFF Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the OFF position If the windshield wiper control is turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the OFF position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the Wind shield Wiper Washer Control Lever to the first detent and then turn the end of the lever to sele
269. n the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scald ing or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store
270. n towing a trailer If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark turn the engine off immediately and call for service There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioning is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to Floor and the Fan control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 4 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 5 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level drops to 2 gallons the fuel symbol will light and a single chime will sound 6 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on briefly when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s electrical devices such as the Fog Lights or Rear Defroster If the Charging System Light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATEL
271. naging oc cupant energy during an impact event All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat If you will be carrying children too small for adult size seat belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE The front airbags have a dual stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they
272. nd burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column To unlock the steering column push the control handle downward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position pull the control handle upward until fully engaged ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The tilt telescoping adjustment must be locked while driving Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the tilt telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h Electronic Speed Control Operation The Speed Control Lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 818f2005 Speed Control Location To Activate O Push and release the ONOFF button located on the end of the Speed Control Lever T
273. nd hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VOICE RECOG NITION button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality a
274. nd of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges NOTE For vehicles so equipped the wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel nuts When reinstalling the original wheel properly align the wheel cover to the valve stem place the wheel cover onto the wheel and then install the wheel nuts 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 8 Finish tightening the nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft Ibs 135 N m If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station 9 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 10 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area have the tire repaired or rep
275. ndards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Se EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
276. nds Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes redial previous record again ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM VR IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition System VR Operation This Voice Recognition System allows you to we control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE In a stressful situation take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively af fected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention sh
277. never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle FLEXIBLE FUEL 2 7L ENGINES ONLY EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only by the unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Unleaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles 81ae46ab E 85 Fuel Cap es STARTING AND OPERATING 313 ETHANOL FUEL E 85 1 CAUTION E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can 15 unleaded gasoline E 85 operate on E 85 WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause s
278. ng process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with PRO GRAMMING HOMELINK Step 2 and follow all re maining steps Se
279. ng auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and all objects from the window path before closing Reset Auto Up If the vehicle battery goes dead the auto feature will be disabled To reactivate the auto feature perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored 1 Make sure the convertible top is closed raised and latched 2 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 3 Push the window switch down firmly to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window control on the passenger door To disable the window control on the 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee passenger door press and release the window lock button setting it in the down position To enable the window control press and release the window lock button again setting it in the up position Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter
280. nter clockwise and remove it from the housing 81b7273b Backup and Rear Fog Light 3 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the housing and rotate the connector 1 4 turn clockwise to lock it in place es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 License Plate Light 2 Gently pry the lens loose 1 Remove the two retaining screws from the lens 3 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 4 Install the lens and the two retaining screws 819ba516 Location and Removal of Rear License Light Lens 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 3 Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector and 1 Open the trunk lid then connect the replacement bulb 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the CHMSL housing and rotate the connector 1 4 turn clock wise to lock it in place 2 Rotate the bulb s electrical connector 14 turn counter clockwise and remove it from the CHMSL housing High mounted Stop Light Bulb Replacement ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES Engine U S Metric Fuel approximate All Engines 16 9 gallons 64 liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 5 quarts 4 26 liters 2 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 5 quarts 5 2 liters 3 5L Engine SAE 10W 30
281. ntrolled safety systems including the PEE airbag system Airbag disable light status if equipped lime of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transaxle gear selection 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire pressure monitoring system status If Equipped Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in
282. nual Seat Adjusting Bar es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Recliner Adjustment The recliner control is on the outboard side of the seat To recline the seat lean forward slightly and lift the lever Then lean back to the position desired and release the Seatback Adjustment lever To return the seatback to its normal upright posi tion lean forward and lift the lever Release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING inboard side of the seat Turn the control lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Lumbar Support If Equipped This featu
283. o always achieve 10 of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General en STARTING AND OPERATING 329 Information in this section for information on tread wear indicators and for proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in this section for information on replacement tires and for proper tire replacement procedures Re placing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake
284. o retract into or unfold from its stowage area in the trunk When lowering the top the system extends the hard tonneau cover which stows conveniently underneath the trunk lid The tonneau cover closes the area between the rear seats and the trunk lid to conceal the top when stowed 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se When raising the top the system retracts the hard tonneau cover back into its stowage area underneath the trunk lid To complete either operation the trunk lid returns to its normal position and then latches Spring loaded flipper doors which provide clearance for the linkage close off notches in the quarter trim panels when the top is up Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions NOTE e The convertible top will not operate unless the vehicle is stationary the cargo protector is positioned cor rectly and the trunk lid is closed and latched In addition the system prohibits lowering the top when ambient temperature is at 0 F 18 C or lower How ever the system allows you to raise the top at ambient temperatures as low as 40 F 40 C e The Power Top Control Module PTCM monitors and controls lowering and raising of the top A series of micro switches verify that operations are complete before allowing the next stage of lowering or raising operation e Opening and closing the top consecutively without the engine running may run the battery down e If a fluttering noise is hear
285. ocate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table show
286. of vehicle mobility and could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual for additional information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced TREAD WEAR INDICATOR These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point STARTING AND OPERATING 295 Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced
287. ollowed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number then say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect system will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone Be network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings too short that may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The VOICE RECOGNITION button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem wil
288. om the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended even in your own driveway or garage Try to park your vehicle in a well lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of value exposed 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Exhaust Gas Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing
289. on Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to calibrate the compass manually When the ve hicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M EVIC will flash the CAL indicator until the compass is calibrated You may calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to calibrate the compass manually How ever prior to calibrating the compass make sure the proper Compass Variance value is selected Refer to Compass Variance for additional information Then continue to calibrate the compass as follows 1 Start the engine Leave the selector lever in PARL in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Press and release the MENU Button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 3 Press and release the STEP button until Calibrate Compass Yes displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the RESET Button and the CAL indicator will quit flashing 5 Drive the vehicle slowly completing one or more circles in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Varianc
290. on Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 15 40 Amp Battery Feed Ra 22 10 Amp Ignition Run Cli Green diator Fan Relay Red mate Controls Hot 16 15 Amp Ignition Run Acc Cup Holder if Lt Blue Cigar Lighter equipped 17 10Amp Wireless Control 23 m 15 Amp Auto Shutdown Red Module WCM Lt Blue _ ASD Relay Feed 3 Clock Steering Con 24 25 Amp Power Top Module trol Module SCM Clear 18 40 Amp Battery Feed Auto 25 10 Amp Ignition Run Green Shutdown ASD Re Red Heated Mirrors if lay equipped 19 20 Amp Power Amp Feed 2 26 15 Amp Auto Shutdown Yellow if equipped Lt Blue ASD Relay Feed 2 20 15 Amp Radio Lt Blue 21 10 Amp Red 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 27 10 Amp Ignition Run Occu 32 30 Amp Auto Shutdown Red pant Classification Pink ASD Relay Feed 1 Module OCM 33 10Amp Battery Feed Occupant Restraint Red Switch Bank Controller ORC Diagnostic Link 28 10 Amp Ignition Run Occu Connector Red pant Classification Powertrain Control Module OCM Module PCM Occupant Restraint 34 30 Amp Battery Feed Anti Controller ORC Pink Lock Brakes ABS 29 Hot Car No Fuse Re Module if quired equipped Electronic 30 2
291. on Center EVIC the radio and steering wheel radio controls if equipped will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For details refer to Key Off Power Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate C E LOAD 6 DISC MP3 WMA PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT VOLUME TUNE SCROLL U AUX 8189f8f9 REQ Radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played
292. on an uphill grade To apply the parking brake grasp the handle and pull it upward until you feel resistance To release the parking brake grasp the handle and pull it slightly while pressing the button on the end of the handle When the button drops into the handle releasing the lock guide the handle downward to its stop and then release the button and the handle Parking Brake Lever NOTE e The parking brake will not release unless the handle is pulled upward slightly past its applied position 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is moving a chime will sound to alert the driver The WARNING chime will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving has returned to a stop children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a The Brake System Warning Light in the instru number of reasons A child or others could be BRAKE ment cluster will turn on when the parking seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in brake is applied and the ignition switch is on the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged applied It does not show the degree of brake application before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident CAUTION If the Brake System Warning Light r
293. ool to do so In the event that you experience a malfunction when operating the power convertible top 1 Read all of the Notes Cautions and Warning found under Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions to verify all operating conditions are met 2 Check for Operation and Warning Messages as de scribed under Power Convertible Top Operation amp Warning Messages If applicable perform the related action to correct the condition present 3 If Steps 1 and 2 do not resolve the problem see your authorized dealer for service Wind Stop The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top opera tion Therefore it can remain installed when the top is up However when not in use the Wind Stop folds to allow for convenient storage underneath the cargo protector in the trunk ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 NOTE It is recommended that you lower the convert ible top before installing or removing the Wind Stop Installing the Wind Stop 1 Remove the Wind Stop from the trunk 2 Unfold the Wind Stop framework 3 Lay the small frame 1 flat on top of the large frame 2 and snap the two frames together by engaging the frame lock 3 NOTE The frames must lie flat on each other in order to snap them together 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 4 Pivot the small frame 1 away from the large frame 2 5 Unfold both stems at the
294. or This feature also turns on the approach lighting if so equipped For details refer to Illuminated Approach under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 The interior lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on NOTE e The illuminated entry system will not operate the interior lights if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk open the convertible top lower both door and rear quarter windows or activate the panic alarm from distances up to 66 feet 20 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system However the line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects when using the transmitter NOTE Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis ables all buttons on the transmitter 81ae0ece Vehicle Key To unlock the doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock both doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system if equipped will also turn on 22 THINGS TO KNOW BE
295. or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram TIRE ROTATION PATTERN FRONT OF VEHICLE E E pu SES E 4 TIRE ROTATION 80ba79fe TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C This means that STARTING AND OPERATING 299 when the outside temperature decreases the tire pres sure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressur
296. ormance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition and e operation from driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Emergency En9lish Phonebook edia A e mergenc Espanol oneboo Francais Last Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed See Setup Phonebook Flowchart Flowchart Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages
297. ould be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the VR hard key you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the VR hard key listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the VR hard key while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words CANCEL HELP or MAIN MENU These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR hard key and say HELP or MAIN M
298. ow Ties 2 343349 3 de RR ES X X RR 298 Spare De gus acte de be dea RR aC d 339 SPINNING 66 4 po Peden d n hb oad odd ed 294 Trailer TOWNS ean Re Rh eX BUR 329 Tread Wear Indicators liess 294 en INDEX 451 T6 Open Hood 4 ce a ees 137 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 326 Tonneau COVER i vus kde ERROR E ER 81 TOWING epaian eo OLGA ae CM edet 322 Behind a Motor Home 333 Disabled Vehicle lille 349 Guid iua EX Ree ka peace ORE ea 325 Recreational css bap Ee awed os 333 Weight ise am ed eee acea 325 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 333 TractiOn iuste REG y EY CI B EREG Quo 271 Traction Control 0 0 0 ee 274 Traction Control Light 040 274 Traction Control Switch lll 274 Trailer TOWING ie deeem oe eS 322 Cooling System Tips 005 332 FAHCH GS ou Bona ae dove rst eletti quei 324 Minimum Requirements 004 327 jr MEE OHNE T CEN 331 Trailer and Tongue Weight 326 Withee teil eee a wih Uca ona dC o en 330 Trailer Towing Guide 0 00 325 Trailer Weight cse hoes eee ee mere ees 325 Transaxle Additives uuu Ghee RUP EU E EYE 386 Automatic llle 251 255 384 Alitostick 245 cc ca e404 Mada e x Re b ERA 262 Filter 0h 203 ec wa gon ea acr Hoe eee a Eat Basen 386 Maintenance 26 cine we ee bok ee ee a 384 Operation gus ashes ed eret s ona eed 255 Overdrive i
299. ower outlet can also energize the cigar lighter in 81974143 the optional cup holder ash receiver 1 Release button for top compartment 2 Release button for bottom compartment 3 Top Compartment 4 Bottom Compartment You can access this compartment directly without first exposing the upper compartment by oper ating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the armrest down 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sliding Armrest If Equipped On some models the center console armrest slides for ward and rearward for added user comfort UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Wi Instrument Panel Features 40 173 B Base Instrument Cluster ellus 174 Bl Premium Instrument Cluster 175 Bi Instrument Cluster Descriptions 176 Bl Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped ssa rmm 187 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays ssa serp ma eee 188 Oil Change Required s te terers pints eres 189 Trip Functions deese ee a E ewe 190 Compass Display 0000 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features s nessa RV ren 194 H Setting The Analog Clock 196 Bl Radio General Information 197 Radio Broadcast Signals 197 Two Types Of Signals 197 Electr
300. own in Section 7 11 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi SET tion If the engine is critically hot a warning chime will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out 12 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute rpm x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 13 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transaxle gear selection 14 OdometerlTrip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven Therefore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometers press and release the Trip Odometer button To reset a trip odom eter display the desired trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets ap proximately 2 seconds Refer to Trip Odometer Button for additional information Vehic
301. pairs is considered the responsibility of the owner ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use Mopar touchup paint on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use Mopar Wheel Cleaner 05066247AB or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products wh
302. payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 429 Call Toll Free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler
303. perating the Power Top e If the vehicle charging system is malfunctioning see your authorized dealer for service e If the battery is run down have it recharged and tested at your authorized dealer e Hydraulic pump overheating can occur if you lower and raise the top consecutively usually more than six or seven times depending upon the ambient temperature Wait at least 5 minutes before operating the Power Top again NOTE If LOCKOUT occurs due to hydraulic pump overheating the system will allow you to raise the top without waiting 5 minutes However do so only if necessary 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 81c7a8c8 1 Auto Dimming Mirror Power Indicator 2 On Off Switch 3 Auto Dimming Mirror Sensor ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean passenger side
304. position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from LOCK OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the engine is running serious conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 26 High Beam Indicator E This light shows that the headlights are on high beam Push the turn signal lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam 27 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Premium Cluster Only This display shows the EVIC messages when the appro priate conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in this section for more informa tion ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED E 14 F FM 101 1 10 819788c7 EVIC Display Location The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display It is located in the lower left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine tem perature ga
305. pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm subscription information including the set up of your on line listening account at no additional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACCESSORY position and the radio ON press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in 2 minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensu
306. presets backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera and on some models a dual display screen operation Refer to your Radio Specific User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to your Radio Specific User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped in section 3 of this manual for detailed operating instructions For Hands Free Phone Communication UConnect Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in section 3 of this manual for detailed operating instructions es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual for detailed operating instruc tions Clock Setting Procedure Setting the Clock 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forwa
307. r and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up ne STARTING AND OPERATING 255 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte grated Power Module Fuse Box on the driver side of the vehicle WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE CAUTION Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Shift the gear selector lever into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift the gear selector lever into or out of RE VERSE only after the vehicle has come to a com plete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not
308. r digit PIN number This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Sentry Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid sentry keys by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the position within 15 sec onds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the position within 60 sec onds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicl
309. r this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area Frontal Area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer and its cargo Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for Class Max CTW Grass Trailer the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can Wt core ler bikh Wn Yo wena bw ing contac eee PnEIDUly soba 7 5 Class II Medium Duty 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on given drivetrain your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transaxle Max Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt 2 4L Auto See Note 1000 Ibs 450 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 2 7L Auto See Note 1500 Ibs 680 kg 150 Ibs 68 kg 3 5L Auto 22 Sq
310. r vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 811adOdO Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when check
311. r you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the back of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 a RO y sD e 2 wd a BRS ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATERINFUEL REARWINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULA HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE OUTLET Low PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE g 3 d 9 l af O 1 cz T BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTERLIGHTING LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPERANDLOWER HEATEDSEAT WINDOWLIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE S CIO y scan Z lt AWD I H Cv T FUELFILLSIDE REARWINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOMELIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWERAIR REC
312. rah 147 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 390
313. rd touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed
314. re allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support The control lever is on the Lumbar Support es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Easy Entry System On the passenger seat pull the lever upward to move the The Easy Entry lever is located on upper seat belt anchor seat and seatback forward cover When returning the seat to its normal position the memory feature restores the seat position and seatback recline position to their current settings EN On the driver seat pull the lever upward to move the seatback forward When returning the seatback to its normal position the memory feature restores the seatback recline position to its current setting Easy Entry Lever 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat CAUHON near the floor Use the switch to move the seat up down Do not place any article under any seat as it may forward rearward or to tilt the seat cause damage to the seat controls WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat Power Seat Switch belt
315. re moving the ignition switch to the START position E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster NOTE Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start of this manual for information on accessing the battery the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery for service or replacement 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the se quence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan DOREM 9 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote jump Any procedure other than above could result in start positive battery post 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out WARNING the battery vent During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because of immobilized vehicle the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start 348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE l WARNING If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the ated by excessive whe
316. re optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pa
317. rear of the large frame until the pivot lock 3 engages to lock the two frames in an L shape 4 ST ger 81bc41c3 81bc41bb ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 6 Align and insert the stems into the slot in each trim 7 Align the pins at the front of the large frame with the panel hole in each trim panel Slide the pins outward until fully extended into each hole 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Removing amp Storing the Wind Stop Reverse the installation procedure to remove fold and store the Wind Stop However note the following before doing so e Disengage the pivot lock 1 to fold the small frame flat onto the large frame Disengage the frame lock 2 to disconnect the small frame from the large frame 81bc4201 Power Convertible Top Operation amp Warning Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the PTCM dis plays various power convertible top operation and warn ing messages in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped or in the Odometer for vehicles not equipped with the EVIC Refer to the following chart for message related information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 EVIC EVIC Odometer Odometer Odometer Odometer Chime Condition Operator Message Message Message Message Message Message Action Display 5 mph Display 5 mph Display Required Time 8 km h o 9 Tim
318. right protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc SALES CODE REN MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN multimedia system contains a radio CD DVD player USB port a 20 gigabyte Hard Drive HDD and a JukeBox virtual CD changer Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 inch touch screen allows for easy menu selection 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se A 20 gigabyte Hard Drive HDD allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port While the Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the car speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other special features include direct tune music type selections easy store
319. rmal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon mH monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and
320. ro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 276 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM ESP IF EQUIPPED This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESP corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS indicator light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The indicator light also flashes when the TCS is active If the indicator light b
321. ront end dolly must be used Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground With The Ignition Key Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL the distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles 25 km and the towing speed must not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Exceeding these towing limits may cause a trans axle failure If the transaxle is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 25 km the vehicle must be transported either with a flat bed truck or with the front wheels off the ground 350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION e If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ON position not in the LOCK or ACC position Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans axle may result If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the transaxle remains in NEUTRAL TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY Rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels on the ground as transaxle damage can result I
322. s examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s from Tire Placard weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ib 100 Ibs 80 Ibs 865 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 287 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 los TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 811a4d11 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure e Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cush
323. s feature The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Headlights with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center in Section 4 of this manual Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the Windshield Wiper Washer Control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the OFF position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn OFF Adding Washer Fluid NOTE Refer to the appropriate Engine Compartment diagram in Section 7 for the location of the washer fluid reservoir The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite a
324. s properly and may be unable to play the file nor discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times The radio uses the following limits for file systems If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats e Maximum number of folders 100 The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file character extension as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names mH wn e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio character extension data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz Bit Bate Kbps 320 2
325. s that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements devel oped during extensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to DaimlerChrysler Corporation engines Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 NOTE Your engine oil filler cap also describes the correct engine oil to use ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 CAUTION Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in drivability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel con sumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg and your driving range to decrease by about 30 com pared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficu
326. se the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC Press and release the STEP button to display the follow ing programmable features Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the RESET button while in this display selects English Espanol or Francais depending on availability As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transaxle is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button To make your selection press and release the RESET button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Sound Horn with LOCK When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry LOCK button is pressed T
327. spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 CAUTION WARNING Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace Limited Use Spare If Equipped or repair the original tire at the first opportunity The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use result in loss of vehicle control spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result 294 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Prolonged use of limited use spare or incorrect tire size of front wheel may damage the transaxle differ ential and result in loss
328. starter do not crank the Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan If the engine is flooded it may start to run but not have gerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 of enough power to continue running when the key is this manual for proper jump starting procedures released If this occurs continue cranking up to 15 and follow them carefully engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again 254 STARTING AND OPERATING ME seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting or Ex treme Cold Weather procedures With Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floo
329. stead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language Phonebook Download UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept vcard entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone owners manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX trans fers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a mess
330. strictly adhered to e Do not make any modifications to the front seat components assembly or to the seat cover in any way e Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired Al ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle e Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar e Atno time should any Supplemental Restraint System SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front seat assembly its related components or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag de ployment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the driver or front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS If A Deployment Occurs The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will
331. sure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar 811adOdO Tire Placard Location Tire and Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRO THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS NEVER EXCEED XXX KG T125 70D15 SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ci 4N109268 420kPa 60PSI P Tire and Loading Information Placard 811b5a9a This placard tells you important information about 1 the number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires en STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle l
332. switches radio hands free system if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until OFF 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illumination Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Display Units in English or Metric The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the RESET button until US or METRIC appears SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel press and hold the but ton until the setting is correct The clock will adjust slowly at first and then quicker the longer the button is held 819f2c59 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and sav
333. system an electronic brake controller is not required 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 450 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 WARNING Ibs 907 kg Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 450 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety STARTING AND OPERATING 331 Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles RUNNING BATTERY wiring harness LAMPS BACKUP The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle LH LAMPS but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector STOP RH STOP TURN RIGHT STOP TURN
334. t To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT coolant e Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine coolants may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the speci fied coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use When adding coolant additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as e The manufacturer recommends using Mopar they may not be compatible with the radiator Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula LEN engine coolant and may plug the radiator HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology 7 This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propy lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection i
335. t Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Air Filter will reduce but not eliminate diesel and agricultural smells The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to the Maintenance Schedules in Section 8 of this manual for filter service intervals UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PA
336. t and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the VOICE RECOGNI TION button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the UConnect system Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UConnect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at anytime while the list is be
337. t or between J and 23 In very cold weather p if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 4 8160180a 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Electric Rear Window Defroster If Equipped The electric Rear Window Defroster Control is To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the located on the climate control Press this button to rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the mirrors if equipped An LED in the button will illumi interior surface of the window nate when the rear window defroster is ON The de Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm froster automatically turns off after approximately 10 water minutes of operation for the first push of the button and will turn off after approximately five minutes for the second push of the button STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures ananunua annua 251 Automatic Transaxle Ignition Automatic Transaxle 000 0 251 Interlock System Leg aot bee ep EE cerei Normal Starting 52 22 9 9 a 252 4 Speed Or 6 Speed AutoStick Automatic Transaxle 000 0 Extremely Cold Weather i Below 20 F Or
338. t spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose rout ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or moving component that may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of degradation that could cause failure Fuel System Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are designed with tubes and special connects connections and clamps which have unique material characteristics to provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deterio rated gasoline You are urged to use only the manufactures specified tubes connections and clamps or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte nance Schedule in this manual 7 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake peda
339. tank level DTE cannot be reset through the RESET button es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE display value e When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units In To make your selection press and release the RESET button until US or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently displayed Press and hold the RESET button once to clear the function currently displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the RESET button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will display during this three second window Compass Display The compass heading indicates the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight COMPASS compass heading and the outside tempera ture Butt
340. tat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres sure tested for leaks e Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 Hoses and Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or sof
341. tation If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNI
342. teering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad equate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control es STARTING AND OPERATING 297 CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings Alignment And Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in e Fast tire wear e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear e Vehicle pull to right or left Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer for proper diagnosis Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear TIRE CHAINS Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom mended CAUTION Damage
343. ter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Illuminated Approach under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To lock the doors Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock both doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal Sound Horn with Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK pos
344. tertainment System VES Guide 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF Right Hand Switch Functions EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel The left and right hand e Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume controls are rocker type switches with a push button in the center of each switch Reach behind the steering wheel to access the switches e Press the top of the switch to increase the volume e Press the button in the center of the switch to change modes i e AM FM etc Left Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation e Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting e Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station down from the current setting e Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to the next preset that you have programmed BACK VIEW OF STEERING WHEEL 818fcae7 Remote Sound Controls es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Left Hand Switch Functions for Media i e CD Operation e Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next track e Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to the beginning of the current track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play e Press the switch up or down twice to listen to t
345. tesy light is also found in the rear of the center console You can turn this light on and off from the dimmer control in the Multi Function Lever This light is also controlled automatically by the illuminated entry system Battery Saver Feature To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open Dimmer Control The Dimmer Control is part of the Multi Function Con trol Lever It controls the operation of the interior lights and the brightness of the instrument panel lights es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 81414630 Dimmer Control Instrument Panel Dimming With the parking lights or headlights on rotate the Dimmer Control upward or downward to change the brightness of the instrument panel lights Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the Dimmer Control to the first detent to brighten the odometer and radio display when the parking lights or headlights are on during daylight conditions Interior Light ON Rotate the Dimmer Control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the Dimmer Control completely downward to the O OFF position The interior lights will remain off whe
346. tick Either the range mark ings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the Ij range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of the range marking 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine Engine Oil Dipstick 818168a4 will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for information on this system NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever occurs first ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recom mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils
347. ting occurs while using the DRIVE OVERDRIVE range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions ie in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions using the 3 range will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up 3 DRIVE With 4 Speed Transaxle This range eliminates shifts into DRIVE OVERDRIVE The transaxle will operate normally in First Second and Third while in this range The 3 DRIVE range should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress NOTE Using the 3 DRIVE range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up LOW With 4 Speed Transaxle This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will en STARTING AND OPERATING 261 occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections CAUTION If the transaxle operating temperature exceeds ac ceptable limits the vehicle computer will override DRIVE OVERDRIVE and 5 for 6 Speed AutoStick transaxle and 3 for 4 Speed auto trans axle range by changing shift points This is done to prevent transaxle damage due to overheating Reset Mode Electronic Transaxle The transa
348. tinue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Automatic Locking Mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked However the belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger seating positions Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger seating position Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdo
349. tion afforded The TCS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a TCS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM BAS IF EQUIPPED This system complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability dur ing emergency braking maneuvers This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hyd
350. tion indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Refer to Tire Inflation Pressures under Tires Gen eral Information and to Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS in Section 5 of this manual for more informa tion 25 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system 4 called OBD that monitors emissions engine and automatic transaxle control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN
351. tive only while the ignition switch is in the ON position Always press the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector out of PARK NOTE If a malfunction occurs the transaxle will not shift out of PARK Battery power is required to release the Brake Transaxle Interlock system However an override system allows you to shift out of PARK in case of loss of power To activate the override system e Firmly apply the parking brake e Insert the ignition key into the ignition key lock cylinder and rotate it to the ON position e Remove the cup holder liner ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 e Insert a key screwdriver or finger into the hole at the front of the cup holder and push and hold the manual override release lever forward e While holding the release lever forward move the gear selector lever from PARK to NEUTRAL e Release the manual override NOTE If this occurs even if the override is successful it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the problem could recur Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the selector lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ON position and the brake pedal is applied NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this sa
352. to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used 298 STARTING AND OPERATING Se SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of 4 failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for the recommended tire rotation frequency Remember more frequent rotation is permissible if de sired Also correct for anything causing rapid
353. trol knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or mm more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary
354. trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke Trunk Emergency Release Interior Trunk Emergency Release NOTE As a security measure a Trunk Internal Emer gency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow in the dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism See picture OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems The following safety features are standard on your vehicle Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions Pretensioning and load limiting retractors for the front seat belts Advanced dual stage driver and front passenger air bags New active vent front passenger airbags Knee Bolsters Blockers for front seat occupants THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Supplemental seat side Thorax airbags Supplemental front seat side mounted head airbags Front seat belt retractors that incorporate pretension ers to enhance occupant protection by ma
355. ts DRL If Equipped The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime Running Lights DRL and operate at DRL lower inten sity whenever the ignition is on the engine is running ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the selector lever is in any position except P Park NOTE The Daytime Running Lights will turn off automatically when the turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned to the LOCK position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out on the end of the Multi Function Control Lever 818fc843 Front Fog Light Control NOTE The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turn Signals Move the Multi Function Lever upward or downward and the corresponding turn signal indicator on the in strument panel will flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 818fc850 Turn Signal Control You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially upward
356. tton to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscrip tion SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second channel to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into push button memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to push button memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone lf Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video En
357. type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with one window down in certain open or partially open posi tions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with one window open then open both windows together to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE To unlatch the trunk lid from inside the vehicle press and release the Trunk Release Button located on the instru ment panel to the left of the steering wheel ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 NOTE The following conditions must be met in order To unlatch the trunk lid from outside the vehicle press for this switch to operate and release the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless e The gear selector lever must be in PARK Entry RKE transmitter two times With the ignition ON the word deck will display in the odometer indicating the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the trip button is pressed e The convertible top must be either closed and latched or open and latched With the key in the lock position or with the key out the word deck will display until the trunk is closed On vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC the words Trunk Ajar will display Trunk Release Button 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the
358. uel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and doing so will cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The Malfunction Indicator Light in the in strument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tight ened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the instrument clus ter Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight ened Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 VEHICLE LOADING The load
359. uges The EVIC consists of the following UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 System Status Vehicle information warning message displays Personal Settings customer programmable features Compass heading display N S E W NE NW SE SW Outside temperature display F or C Trip computer functions Audio mode displays 12 preset Radio Stations or CD Title and Track number when playing Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS displays if equipped 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons on the Instrument Panel Switch Bank Press and release the MENU button to advance the display to Trip Functions or Personal Set tings or to return to the default System Status MENU Button display Press and release the STEP button to advance STEP ihe display through the various Trip Functions V sor Personal Settings STEP Button Press and release the COMPASS button to A display the compass heading and the outside temperature COM PASS Button Press and release the RESET Button to accept a selection The RESET Button also resets various Trip Functions gt RESET RESET Button Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime e Left Front Turn Signa
360. using for 8 seconds before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist Song Title and Composer if available information Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 3 seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the SELECT bu
361. vail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the PHONE button to begin ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change opera tion only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and m
362. ver in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen If the words Time GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen proceed to Step 4 Otherwise proceed to Step 3 3 If the words Time User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen touch the bottom of the screen where the words User Clock are displayed The GPS time setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will app
363. vice Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your vehicle Your authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns 426 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 427 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you bel
364. wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook UConnect phonebook nametag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the phonebook You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Perf
365. ward to the next song To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the desired track press the SCAN button again During the SCAN mode you can also press the SEEK button to the left or right to go to the previous or next tracks List or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the following buttons will take you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod device TUNE SCROLL Knob In the List mode the TUNE SCROLL knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod Turning the TUNE SCROLL knob clockwise forward and counter clockwise backward scrolls through lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se display press the TUNE SCROLL knob to select and start playing the track By turning the TUNE SCROLL knob fast you can jump through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display During all List modes the iPod will display all lists in wrap around mode So if the track you wish to select is at the bottom of the list you just turn the TUNE SCROLL knob backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster Radio Preset Buttons In the List mode the radio preset buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on th
366. weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or compl
367. wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open amp close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the learn or training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for 2 sec onds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for 2 seconds to complete the training If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycli
368. xle is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transaxle automatically shifts into 2nd gear 3rd gear for 6 speed The transaxle remains in 2nd gear 3rd gear for 6 speed despite the forward gear selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transaxle In the event of a momentary problem the transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle Shift the gear selector lever into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position Restart the engine oT Ae C N Shift the gear selector lever into the desired gear range and resume driving 262 STARTING AND OPERATING E NOTE Even if the transaxle can be reset it is recom mended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transaxle cannot be reset dealer service is required AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transaxle that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing
369. y short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 415 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often
370. you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title ae Vehicle Identification Number NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN en INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS ua Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its road worthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll A Word About Your Keys 0 0 12 Ignition Key Removal lesse 12 Key In Ignition Reminder 14 WM Sentry Rey 1zuuosa s RE E RR 15 Replacement Keys llle 16 Sentry Key Programming 17 General Information 18 ll Security Alarm System If Equipped 18 Rearming Of The System 18 To Arm The System 000006 19 To Disarm The System 00 0 19 H Illuminated Entry System If Equipped 20 Bl Remote Keyless Entry
371. your call is answered you will hear the audio ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an on going call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the VOICE REC OGNITION button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different 3 electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready promp

Sebring Convertible

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents